JP2020031978A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a game area 32, a normal variation winning device 37 that forms a start winning port and can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be easily won, and a second start winning port 97 that forms a start winning port are provided. The normal variation winning device 37 and the second start winning port 97 are provided on the flowing-down path of the same game ball and that can be aimed simultaneously. Game control means can set the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 to either one of a first operation state and a second operation state in which winning is easier than the first operation state, and in the second operation state, can switch between a first zone and a second zone on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 79

Description

  The present invention includes a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and executes a game based on winning of a game ball into a start winning port provided in the game area, and when a result of the game is a special result. And a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (symbols, symbols, etc.) displayed on the variable display device provided in the game area based on the fact that a game ball wins in the starting port provided in the game area (start winning). ) Is started, and when the mode of the plurality of pieces of identification information stopped after the lapse of a predetermined time is a predetermined special result mode, a special payout of paying out many prize balls to the player is performed. Some are in a gaming state. There is also known such a gaming machine provided with a normal variable winning device that changes the ease of winning at the starting port by changing the operation mode of the movable member (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-121302 A

  However, the operation of the movable member only aims to increase the winning in the starting opening and to be able to execute a plurality of variable display games in a short time, which further contributes to the improvement of the interest of the game. Was not. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
A game area is provided in which a game ball can flow down, and a game is executed based on a prize of a game ball to a start winning port provided in the game area, and when a result of the game is a special result, In gaming machines that generate advantageous special gaming states,
Game control means for controlling the game overall,
In the game area,
A normal variable winning device that forms the starting winning opening, and can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and an open state in which game balls can be easily won,
A second start winning opening that forms the starting winning opening,
The normal fluctuation winning device and the second starting winning opening are arranged on the same game ball's flow path so as to be able to aim at the same time,
The game control means,
The operation state of the ordinary variable prize winning device can be set to one of a first operation state and a second operation state in which a prize is easier than the first operation state,
In the second operating state, it is possible to switch between the first zone and the second zone based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of a game can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining the modification of a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining the modification of a normal fluctuation winning device. It is a front view of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a top view of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of an opening / closing member, (a) is a closed state, (b) is an open state. It is a figure explaining a rolling mode of a game ball in a special fluctuation winning device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a figure for explaining transition of a game state. It is a figure explaining the relation between the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device and various times. It is a figure explaining composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern. It is a figure explaining an opening and closing pattern of a special fluctuation winning device. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port 3 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining a support management process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 change process transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 change process transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 changing process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 display process shift setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during opening of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining sphere process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command analysis process. It is a figure explaining an ordinary figure fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the relation between the execution mode of a normal figure change display game, and the execution mode of a special figure change display game. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in a display. It is a figure for explaining an example of an effect in a display. It is a figure explaining an example of a launch direction indication display. It is a figure explaining the relation between the execution mode of a special figure change display game, etc., and the execution mode of launch direction indication display. It is a figure explaining the relation between the execution mode of a special figure change display game, etc., and the execution mode of launch direction indication display.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and notify when an abnormality has occurred (for example, when a dispensing abnormality has occurred, the lamp, LED, and the like are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19 a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the details of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 including an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided. A touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  On the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball firing device moves the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 80 serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantially center of the game area 32, a center case 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind a window formed in the center case 40.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a CRT (CRT). A still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image in an area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area). For example, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) Information about the game, such as a background image that enhances the effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and game balls that have passed through the warp flow path are rolled. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage section 620 of the center case 40 is disposed above the first starting winning opening 36, the game balls rolled on the stage section 620 can easily win the first starting winning opening 36. In addition, a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating is provided on an upper portion of the center case 40. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 19) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  In the gaming area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, two general winning openings 35 are arranged, and on the right side of the center case 40, one general winning opening 35 is arranged. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by a winning opening switch 35a provided in the general winning opening 35 (see FIG. 19).

  In the gaming area 32 below the center case 40, a first start winning port 36 (first start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. . The game ball that has won the first starting winning port 36 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 19). In the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game). Have been. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 19).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 is provided between the general-purpose starting gate 34 and the second starting winning opening 97. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed by winning the winning opening (general winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning apparatus 37, or the special figure 1 start winning memory (first start memory). ) Is stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (the general winning opening 37d) is a first start winning area that gives a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). is there. Then, the game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 19), and when a game ball is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 The special figure 1 change display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning prize memory is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the universal winning port 37d and the first starting winning port 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (the starting port in FIG. 1), and the second starting winning port 97 is the second starting winning port 97. It corresponds to a winning area (a starting port in FIG. 2).

  The game control device (game control means) 100 performs a control to convert the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the general figure fluctuation display game. (Conversion control means) (see FIG. 19). Although the details of the configuration of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 will be described later, in the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is moved forward and backward (slids) in the front-rear direction by the general-purpose solenoid 37c, so that the general-purpose winning prize is obtained. This is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the mouth 37d (makes a game ball enterable into the general winning opening 37d). In addition, as the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the universal winning opening 37d by turning the upper end side in the direction of falling forward by the universal solenoid 37c is provided. You may. The game control device 100 can open the movable member 37b via the general-purpose solenoid 37c and allow the game ball to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 when the result of the general-purpose variable display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Open state.

  Further, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the general-floor fluctuation display game or setting the hit probability of the general-floor fluctuation display game higher than normal, The time reduction state (general power support (electric support) state) is generated by making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the gaming state.

  In the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a special variable winning device 38 is provided. As shown in FIG. 15 to FIG. 18, the special fluctuation winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38 d into a state in which a game ball can flow in when the opening / closing member 990 moves forward and backward (slides) in the front-rear direction. The special fluctuation winning device 38 changes the special winning opening 38d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the special winning opening 38d. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 19).

  That is, the special fluctuation winning device 38 of the present embodiment opens and closes the closed winning opening 38d from the closed state (a disadvantageously closed state for the player) with the opening and closing member 990 depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as the auxiliary game. The member 990 retreats and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to an acceptable open state (a state advantageous to the player). Then, the game ball arriving at the special fluctuation winning device 38 is repeatedly guided diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992 and diagonally forward guided by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964, It flows down from right to left, meandering back and forth. This allows the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 in a longer time than in the case in which the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, the recess 993, and the like do not rise and fall linearly in the flow path 38f. become longer. Therefore, a game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. Is likely to fall and win the large winning opening 38d, and the player can have a sense of expectation for winning even if the opening is short.

  Also, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 jumps by contacting the protrusion 992 and is guided in a direction away from the special winning opening 38d. In addition, the bouncing game balls may come further away from the special winning opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, or the like. In addition, since the protruding portions 992 are arranged at intervals so that the game balls can pass through, the protruding portions 992 may fall without contacting the protruding portions 992 through this interval. In this manner, by providing the protrusion 992, the front wall protrusion 954, and the rear wall protrusion 964, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can. In addition, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the timing of inflow of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the special winning opening 38d can be shifted, so that ball clogging occurs in the special winning opening 38d. Can be prevented. The configuration in which the game balls in the normal variable winning device 37 described later are retained may be used as the configuration in which the game balls are retained in the special variable winning device 38. May be used as a configuration in which the game balls in the normal variable winning device 37 are retained.

  Returning to FIG. 2, in the game area 32 below the first start winning port 36, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like is provided. In addition, the special figure change display game (the special figure 1 change display game, the special figure 2 change display game) and the normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 80. A batch display device 50 is provided.

  The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure change display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 change display for a special figure 1 change display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display for game (second special figure fluctuation display section) 52 and a storage display section 53 for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps are provided.

  The collective display device 50 has a round display portion 55 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed), and a hitting method which is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal hit) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying (hitting style corresponding to the game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure change display game are provided. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display unit for displaying that the large hit state is in the high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display that lights up when a big hit occurs and informs of the big hit occurrence. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.

  Further, a general-figure display section 58 for displaying a general-figure fluctuation display game, a storage display section 59 for notifying the number of stored start-ups of the general-figure fluctuation display game, a light-on state when a time-saving state occurs, and a time-saving state for notifying the occurrence of the time-saving state A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

  The special figure variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variable display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variable display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blink cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink in addition to the center segment. It is configured to display that it is fluctuating, and to be able to distinguish between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. When the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment (the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the missing, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the loss result mode as a hit result mode (special result mode).

  The storage display unit 53 displays the number of undigested balls out of the number of winning balls to the first starting winning port 36 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 serving as the starting conditions for changing the special figure 1 display 51 (the number of stored starting = the number of reserved). Is displayed by turning off and on (flashing) the plurality of LEDs. The round display unit 55 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on the light. Note that the round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment display.

  The first game state display unit 56 turns off all the LEDs in a state where the game is progressed by performing, for example, a left strike (at the time of a normal strike), and performs a game by performing a right strike. When all the LEDs are turned on, the state is set so as to proceed (when right-handed). The probability display unit 57 turns off all the LEDs when the big hit probability state is the low probability state (normal probability state), and turns off all the LEDs when the big hit probability state is the high probability state (probable change state). Is turned on.

  FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 30 included in the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 forms a game board body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component 600 forming a front portion of the center case 40, and a rear portion of the center case 40. And a rear component 700 to which various members required for the board 30 are attached. The rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess that opens forward, and inside the recess forms a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. , And various movable character units are provided.

  The front component 600 is provided with a general winning opening 35, a warp channel forming member 614, a stage 620, and the like. In addition to the front structural member 600, the game board main body 80 includes a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a first starting winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 97, a normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special fluctuation winning device 37, and a special fluctuation. The winning device 38, the collective display device 50, and the like are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, on the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, there is formed a downflow path 615 which is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates up and down. (Specifically, game balls that have arrived at the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37 but have not won the ordinary variable prize apparatus 37) flow down through the downflow path 615. A guide 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The guiding portion 616 has an upper surface 617 that is an inclined surface that descends to the left, receives a game ball flowing down the downflow path 615 by the upper surface 617, and has a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38. You will be guided to the left.

[Normal variable winning device]
Next, an example of the configuration of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. FIG. 5A is a top view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is closed, and FIG. 5B is a top view of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is open. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a flow path rear wall 373a disposed along the front surface of the game board main body 80, and a flow path front wall 371a disposed in front of the flow path rear wall 373a. And a downflow path 37f through which the game balls can flow down in a line. The downflow path 37f is inclined so as to go down to the right when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down rightward in a row. In addition, the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 allows the game balls to pass in a line inside the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (specifically, inside the base portion constituted by the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375). And a substantially U-shaped bypass 37g. As shown in FIG. 4, the entrance 37g1 (one end of the detour 37g) and the exit 37g2 (the other end of the detour 37g) of the detour 37g are formed on the rear wall 373a of the flow path, and the game ball is formed. Flows into the detour 37g one by one from the downflow path 37f via the inlet 37g1, and flows out one by one from the detour 37g to the downflow path 37f via the outlet 37g2.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front wall 371a of the flow path has a protrusion 371b that protrudes rearward and penetrates the rear wall 373a of the flow path. The protruding portion 371b is a position where a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f collides, and is disposed at a position between the entrance 37g1 and the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g. Accordingly, the protruding portion 371b prevents the game ball from flowing down the downflow path 37f on the way (ie, before flowing into the end point (downstream end) of the downflow path 37f), thereby moving the game ball to the bypass 37g. It is designed to guide. Since the projecting portion 371b is provided in the middle of the downflow path 37f, the game ball cannot flow into the end point of the downflow path 37f unless passing through the detour 37g.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the bottom surface of the central portion and the right end portion of the downflow path 37f and the bottom surface of the bypass 37g are constituted by a movable member 37b slidable in the front-rear direction. The movable member 37b protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 5 (a) and is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (general winning opening 37d), as shown in FIG. 5 (b). In this way, it is possible to convert to an open state in which a game ball can be awarded to the general electricity winning opening 37d by retreating backward. That is, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state and cannot flow into the general winning opening 37d, and the movable member 37b is in the open state. In the case of, it is possible to flow into the general winning opening 37d.

  Specifically, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. That is, it flows down the downflow path 37f to the protrusion 371b, collides with the protrusion 371b, and flows into the detour 37g. Further, when the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the protrusion 371b, the movable member 37b is opened, or the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f flows into the upper surface of the movable member 37b. When the movable member 37b is in the open state at this time, the game ball flows into the general winning opening 37d without passing through the bypass 37g.

  Further, the game ball that has flowed through the detour 37g and flowed into the end point of the downflow path 37f flows into the general winning award opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the open state. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and flowed into the end point of the downflow path 37f does not flow into the general winning award opening 37d, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not flow. It advances to the outside and flows down to the guiding section 616 through, for example, the downflow path 615. That is, the game ball corresponds to a game ball that failed to win the normal variable winning device 37 (a game ball that did not win the normal variable winning device 37 despite arriving at the normal variable winning device 37). . When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the front wall 371a of the flow channel, but the gap is such that a game ball cannot flow.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a starting port 2 switch 37a, and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a general-purpose solenoid 37c. Further, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a front decoration member 371 having a front wall 371a of the flow path, a front base member 373 having a rear wall 373a of the flow path, a rear base member 375 to which the movable member 37b and the like are attached, and a rear base member 375. A rear cover member 377 covering the rear surface of the member 375, a front LED substrate 372a and a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a to a rear surface of the front decoration member 371, a rear LED substrate 376a and the rear LED substrate 376a. And a rear substrate holder 376 for fixing the rear substrate member 375 to the rear surface of the rear base member 375.

  At least the front decoration member 371, the front base member 373, and the rear base member 375 are made of a material that can transmit light. A front LED board 372a is arranged behind the front decoration member 371 as decoration means, and a rear LED board 376a is arranged behind the rear base member 375 as decoration means. It is possible to decorate.

  The front decoration member 371 has a plate-shaped front portion 371c. The front surface of the front portion 371c is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game balls do not flow down in front of the front surface. The front surface of the front portion 371c is a surface that can be visually recognized by a player, and is decorated. The upper part of the plate-shaped front part 371c is a flow path front wall 371a that forms a front side wall of the downflow path 37f.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) upstream front wall protrusions 371d projecting rearward are provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined. The upstream front wall projection 371d has a function of guiding a game ball flowing to the right backward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 37f and suppress the power. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f can contact.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a downstream front wall protrusion 371e that projects rearward is provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The downstream-side front wall protrusion 371e is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined. The downstream front wall projection 371e has a function of guiding a game ball flowing to the right backward to make the game ball flowing into the end point of the downflow path 37f meander and suppress the power. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f can contact. Further, the downstream front wall projection 371e is provided so that a game ball flowing around the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (outside of the normal fluctuation winning device 37) is downstream into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the flow path 37f). It has a function of preventing intrusion from the end point side).

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the front decoration member 371. As shown in FIG. 6A, a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front portion 371c are provided on the rear surface side of the front decoration member 371. The function of the extension wall 371f differs depending on the place where the extension wall 371f is provided, and the bottom wall 371f1, which forms the bottom surface of the flow passage 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the starting point (upstream end) of the flow passage 37f), General electricity winning port formation part 371f2 which forms a side wall and a bottom surface of the general electricity winning port 37d, an induction channel forming part 371f3 which forms an induction channel 37e for guiding a game ball which has won the general electricity winning port 37d, a starting port 2 switch. The switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4, which forms a mounting portion for mounting the 37a, has a function as a peripheral wall 371f5 for preventing a game ball flowing around the normal fluctuation winning device 37 from entering the inside.

  The bottom surface portion 371f1 that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down path 37f is an inclined surface that is inclined leftward when viewed from the rear surface side. The general winning a prize port forming unit 371f2 is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the general prize winning port 37d into the guide channel 37e. The game balls can flow in a line into the guide channel 37e, and a starting port 2 switch 37a is provided in a portion where the game balls flow into the guide channel 37e. As a result, all the game balls flowing into the general winning opening 37d flow into the guiding flow path 37e after being detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a. The guiding flow path 37e formed by the guiding flow path forming part 371f3 is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the general winning opening 37d to the rear side of the game board 30, and the game ball on the rear side of the front part 371c. A rib 371g for guiding backward is formed.

  The front LED board 372a and the front board holder 372 are disposed on the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 inside the peripheral wall 371f5 (portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5). The portion of the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 that is surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5 is subjected to a process for scattering light (an uneven process in the example illustrated in FIG. 6A). Thereby, it is possible to effectively decorate the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 with the light from the front LED board 372a and the rear LED board 376a, and to decorate the front LED board 372a itself and the front board holder 372 with the front decoration. It is difficult to see through the front decoration member 371 from the front of the member 371. As shown in FIG. 6B, a plurality of holes (seven in the example shown in FIG. 6B) for releasing heat, such as the front LED board 372a, are provided below the front base member 373. Is provided. These holes are also difficult to see from the front of the front decoration member 371 due to the processing for scattering the light applied to the front decoration member 371.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front base member 373 has a plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b. A front decoration member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and a part of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b that is not hidden by the front decoration member 371 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 373b is a flow path rear wall 373a that forms a rear side wall of the downflow path 37f. A movable member insertion portion 373c is formed at a position serving as a lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a so as to penetrate the movable member 37b from the rear surface side of the front base member 373 in a front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) rear wall projections 373 d protruding forward are provided on the front side of the front base member 373. The rear wall protrusion 373d is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined, and is provided behind the upstream front wall protrusions 371d provided on the flow path front wall 371a. It is provided so as to be located slightly downstream with respect to the protrusion 371d. The rear wall projection 373d has a function of guiding a game ball flowing to the right to the front in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 37f and suppress the power. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f can contact.

  FIG. 6B is a rear view of the front base member 373. As shown in FIG. 6B, the guiding flow path 37 e is provided at the center of the rear surface portion 373 b at a portion facing the portion where the guiding flow channel 37 e is formed in the front decoration member 371. A penetrating portion 373e penetrating back and forth is formed to communicate with the side. As shown in FIG. 6B, a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 373f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b are provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The function of the extension wall 373f differs depending on the location where the extension wall 373f is provided. The extension wall 373f functions as a guide flow path forming portion 373f1 that forms the guide flow path 37e and a peripheral wall 373f2 that forms the periphery of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Have.

  The guide flow path forming part 373f1 forms the guide flow path 37e so as to guide the game balls flowing into the through part 373e backward. Further, a rib 373g for guiding a game ball backward is formed at a lower end portion of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1. The lower end portion of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed at the lower end portion are inclined surfaces whose upper surfaces are lowered rearward. To be guided to. The guided game balls flow out of the gaming machine 10 into a discharge channel for discharging the game balls.

  The peripheral wall 373f2 is formed in accordance with the shape of a penetrating portion formed in a portion of the game board main body 80 where the normal variable prize device 37 is attached and penetrating in the front and rear directions. Then, the peripheral wall 373f2 is in a state of being inserted into the through portion. The rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the peripheral wall 373f2 comes into contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. In this portion, a plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the rear base member 375 includes a peripheral wall 375a that matches front and rear with a peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a pair of rear base members 375 that guide and support a movable member 37b that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing a movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. The movable member holding portion 375b is provided. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are disposed at a predetermined interval (gap 375c), and can contact the lower surface of the movable member 37b so as to guide and support the movable member 37b. Are provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 4, on the front side of the rear base member 375, a movable member unit 374 including a movable member 37b and an operation mechanism (drive mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached. The movable member unit 374 includes a movable member 37b slidable in the front-rear direction, a common solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a for transmitting the driving force from the common solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. And a crank 374b.

  The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b is protruded forward as shown in FIG. 5A, and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted backward as shown in FIG. 5B. Can be converted. The movable member 37b can appear above the universal winning opening 37d via a movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and a movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. I have.

  FIG. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374, and FIG. 7B is a front view of the movable member 37b. FIG. 8A is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 8B is a bottom view of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 7A, the movable member 37b is located at an upper portion 37b1, at a first middle portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than the upper portion 37b1, and at a position lower than the first middle portion 37b2. The provided second middle portion 37b3 and the lower portion 37b4 provided at a position lower than the second middle portion 37b3 form a stepped shape arranged in the left-right direction. The upper section 37b1, the first middle section 37b2, the second middle section 37b3, and the lower section 37b4 are arranged in this order such that the upper section 37b1 is disposed on the leftmost side and the lower section 37b4 is disposed on the rightmost side. The ball is made to flow from left to right.

  The upper end portion 37b1 has a front end portion extending above the universal winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, and serves as a downflow path forming section forming the bottom surface of the downflow path 37f. The downflow path forming portion of the upper section 37b1 is one step lower than portions other than the downflow path forming section of the upper step 37b1. In addition, a lower wall protruding portion 37b5 extends forward from a right end portion of the upper step portion 37b1 other than the downflow path forming portion. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a slope on the left side surface, and is provided so as to gradually narrow the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the downflow passage forming portion. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a function of guiding a game ball flowing rightward to the front in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 37f and suppress the power. That is, it forms a contact portion to which a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f can contact.

  The first middle portion 37b2 has a front end portion extending above the general winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, and is formed as a downflow path forming section forming a bottom surface of the downflow path 37f. A portion other than the portion (that is, a portion other than the downflow path forming section) is a detour forming section that forms the bottom surface of the detour 37g. In the first middle section 37b2, the boundary between the downflow path forming section and the detour path forming section is disposed immediately below the entrance 37g1 of the detour path 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

  The first middle portion 37b2 is inclined such that the rear end is located below the front end. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8A, for example, the game ball easily rolls from the front side to the rear side of the upstream part of the detour 37g. A meandering left ridge 37b6 is formed on the upper surface of the first middle portion 37b2 to protrude upward and extend back and forth. This makes it possible to meander the game balls rolling on the detour 37g and suppress the ball's power.

  The second middle portion 37b3 has a front end portion extending above the general winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, and a protruding portion 371b for guiding a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f to the bypass 37g. It is arranged immediately below.

  When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the lower end portion 37b4 has a front end portion extending above the general winning opening 37d, and a bottom surface of the flow passage 37f (specifically, a bottom surface at the end point of the flow passage 37f). The part other than the front end part (that is, the part other than the falling path forming part) is a detour forming part that forms the bottom surface of the detour 37g. In the lower section 37b4, the boundary between the downflow path forming section and the detour forming section is disposed immediately below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

  The lower step portion 37b4 is inclined such that the rear end is located above the front end, and the rear end portion is flush with the rear end portion of the first middle step portion 37b2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8A, for example, the game ball easily rolls from the rear side to the front side of the downstream part of the detour 37g. Note that the rear end of the lower portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end of the first middle portion 37b2. A meandering right ridge 37b7 is formed on the upper surface of the lower portion 37b4 to protrude upward and extend back and forth. This makes it possible to meander the game balls rolling on the detour 37g and suppress the ball's power.

  As described above, the movable member 37b is provided with the raised portions such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left protrusion 37b6, and the right protrusion 37b7. Further, the front decoration member 371 is provided with a protrusion such as the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with a protrusion such as the rear wall protrusion 373d. . With such a raised portion, the time for which the game ball stays on the movable member 37b is extended.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, a sliding portion 37b8 extending downward is formed at the left end and the right end of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction. It becomes slidable.

  As shown in FIGS. 7B and 8B, a connection pin 37b9 that protrudes downward is provided at the center of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 7A, a through-portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed in a crank (drive arm) 374b that transmits the driving force from the general-purpose solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. When the tip (lower end) of the connection pin 37b9 is inserted into the through portion 374b1, the movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected.

  As shown in FIG. 7B and FIG. 8B, in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b, the front and rear sides of the connection pin 37b9 protrude downward and extend in the front-rear direction. Guide rib 37b10 is provided. The guide rib 37b10 has a gap 373i (see FIG. 6B) formed along the front-rear direction between a pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373, and a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into a gap 375c (see FIG. 4) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. By inserting the guide ribs 37b10 of the movable member 37b into the gaps 373i and 375c from above, it is possible to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction. That is, since the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b fits in the gap 373i of the front base member 373 and the gap 375c of the rear base member 375, the movement of the movable member 37b in the left-right direction is restricted. Can be limited to the movement in the front-back direction.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), a crank 374b for transmitting the driving force from the general-purpose solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member. A penetrating portion 374b1 that can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end. A recess 374a1 is formed in the slider 374a for transmitting the driving force from the general-purpose solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. Thus, the slider 374a and the crank 374b are connected. A rotating shaft 374b3 extending in the up-down direction is formed at the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b is rotatable around the rotating shaft 374b3. In addition, the rotating shaft 374b3 is sandwiched from above and below by a rear base member 375 and is rotatably held.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the slider 374a includes a flat main body 374a2 perpendicular to the vertical direction, a left wall 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body 374a2. A front wall 374a4 connected to the front end of the 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body 374a2, and a projecting piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall 374a4 are provided. A concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

  The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the universal solenoid 37c, and the slider 374a extends the drive shaft 37c1 (in the case of the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right). Then, when the drive shaft 37c1 is pushed by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the right, the drive shaft 37c1 retreats (in the case of the present embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left) and is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 to move to the left. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, a recess 373j extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The protrusion 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recess 373j, and the protrusion 374a5 is inserted into the recess 373j from behind, thereby guiding the slider 374a to move linearly (slide) in the left-right direction. be able to. The front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a contacts the rear surface of the front base member 373 when the protrusion 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted into the recess 373j of the front base member 373 from behind. Thus, the front-back position of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 is set to a predetermined front-back position.

  When changing the movable member 37b from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the general-purpose solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 extends, the slider 374a slides to the right, and the crank 374b rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 374b3 as viewed from the upper surface, so that the connection pin 983a is directed forward. And the movable member 37b projects forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is brought into the closed state (the state shown in FIG. 5 (a)), and it becomes impossible for the game balls to win the general winning opening 37d.

  On the other hand, when converting the movable member 37b from the closed state to the open state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the general-purpose solenoid 37c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 is retracted, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 374b3 as viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 37b9 moves rearward. The movable member 37b moves backward and retracts rearward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 5B), and it is possible to win a game ball to the general electricity winning opening 37d.

  FIG. 9 to FIG. 12 show the rolling modes of the game balls in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. 9 to 12, illustration of some members is omitted for the sake of explanation. The game ball that has arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the game ball that has flowed into the starting point of the downflow path 37f) is first guided obliquely rearward by the upstream front wall protrusion 371d located on the upstream side, and then on the upstream side. Is guided diagonally forward by the rear wall projection 373d located at the position, and flows into the front end of the upper step 37b1 of the movable member 37b.

  The game ball that has flowed into the upper step 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided obliquely rearward by the upstream front wall protrusion 371d located on the downstream side, and then the rear wall projection 373d and the movable member 37b located on the downstream side. Is guided obliquely forward by the lower wall projecting portion 37b5, and flows into the front end portion of the first middle step portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b. That is, the game ball flows down the downflow path 37f while meandering back and forth. Accordingly, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b as compared with the case where the flow path linearly flows down without the rising parts such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d in the flow path 37f. The time gets longer.

  The game ball that has flowed into the first middle portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the protrusion 371b, and is guided rearward by the protrusion 371b and the first middle portion 37b2 that is inclined downward and backward, and FIG. As shown in (a), it flows into the detour 37g from the entrance 37g1 of the detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 10, inside the rear base member 375, a first guide piece 375d for guiding a game ball rolling on the detour 37g from the first middle portion 37b2 to the lower portion 37b4, and a lower portion 37b4 A second guide piece 375e for guiding the upper side from the rear side to the front side is provided. When the game ball rolls on the first middle portion 37b2 as shown in FIG. 10 and flows into the rear base member 375, it is guided to the right by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. It flows into the part 37b4.

  The game ball that has flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b is guided to the front by the second guide piece 375e or the lower portion 37b4 that is inclined forward and downward as shown in FIG. 12, and is shown in FIG. 9B. As described above, the air flows from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g to the end point of the downflow path 37f (the front end of the lower step 37b4). Here, since the meandering left protruding ridge 37b6 is formed in the first middle section 37b2, the game ball rolls rearward on the upstream part of the detour 37g while meandering left and right. Further, since the meandering right ridge 37b7 is formed in the lower portion 37b4, the game ball rolls in the downstream of the detour 37g forward while meandering left and right.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the front base member 373 includes a partition 373k that separates the upstream part and the downstream part of the detour 37g, and the rear end of the partition 373k is upstream of the detour 37g. An intermediate projection 373k1 is formed in a portion corresponding to the portion. Therefore, while rolling on the upstream part of the detour 37g (that is, on the first middle part 37b2), the game ball collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 and bounces, and is once pushed back to the entrance 37g1 side. It is. This allows the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b more than in the case where the detour route 37g does not have a starting portion such as the left protrusion 37b6, the right protrusion 37b7, and the intermediate protrusion 373k1, and the game ball stays on the movable member 37b. become longer.

  As described above, the flow path 37f is provided with the protrusions such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d, and the detour route 37g is provided with the left protrusion 37b6. Since the raised portions such as the right protruding portion 37b7 and the intermediate protruding portion 373k1 are provided, the time for which the game ball stays on the movable member 37b becomes longer. Further, by providing these raised portions, the rolling mode of the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by providing these raised portions, when the movable member 37b is opened, the timing of inflow of a plurality of game balls existing on the movable member 37b into the universal winning opening 37d can be shifted. Ball clogging can be prevented from occurring in the winning opening 37d.

  The game ball arriving at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 flows down the downflow path 37f, and first flows into the upper section 37b1 of the movable member 37b. When the movable ball 37b is in the open state when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, the game ball flows into the general winning opening 37d without passing through the bypass 37g. On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the downflow path 37f and heads toward the protrusion 371b. Then, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball collides with the protruding portion 371b, the game ball flows into the general winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, if the movable member 37b does not open before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b and heads for the detour 37g.

  Even if the movable member 37b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is open while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g. Even if there is no such ball, the game ball continues to roll on the detour 37g and head toward the exit 37g2. When the movable member 37b is in the open state when the game ball comes out of the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, the game ball flows into the general winning award opening 37d. On the other hand, when the movable ball 37b is in the closed state when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, the game ball does not flow into the general electricity winning opening 37d and the normal variable winning device 37 does not flow. Out of the game area (game area 32), and becomes a game ball that fails to win a prize in the normal variable prize device 37.

  Here, the intermediate protrusion 373k1 (see FIG. 6B) formed on the partition wall 373k of the front base member 373 has a function of making the game ball meander and extending the residence time in which the game ball stays on the movable member 37b. Not only that, it also has a function of securing a sufficient residence time even when the movable member 37b operates (moves back and forth) while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g. For example, when the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the downstream portion of the detour 37g (that is, on the lower portion 37b4), the game ball is in contact with the movable member 37b. Since the ball is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream portion of the bypass 37g due to frictional resistance, contact with the right ridge 37b7, or the like, the game ball is rolling on the downstream portion of the bypass 37g. The staying time of the game ball on the movable member 37b is longer than when the state of the movable member 37b is not changed during the operation.

  On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the upstream portion of the detour 37g (that is, on the first middle portion 37b2), the game ball becomes movable. Due to frictional resistance with the member 37b, contact with the left ridge 37b6, and the like, the ball is drawn rearward (downstream) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, so that the game ball rolls over the upstream portion of the detour 37g. The staying time of the game ball staying on the movable member 37b is shorter than when the state of the movable member 37b is not changed during the movement. On the other hand, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has the intermediate protrusion 373k1 provided upstream of the detour 37g, the game sphere moves backward (downstream) in the upstream part of the detour 37g. When it is pulled in, it collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 and bounces. That is, the game ball collides with the intermediate projection 373k1 while being drawn to the downstream side, and is once pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. Even when the movable member 37b is changed to the open state during the rolling of the section, a sufficient residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b can be secured.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the gaming board main body 80 in which the gaming area 32 in which the game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, and the variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In this case, the gaming machine includes a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80, and a game area. An opening / closing member (movable) that can be converted into a prize-winning area (in this embodiment, a general winning opening 37d) in which a game ball flowing down to 32 can win a prize, a closed state that closes the prize-winning area, and an open state that opens the prize-winning area. The member 37b), a flow path on which the game ball can roll (downflow path 37f), a stay area for retaining the game ball (a bypass 37g), and a game ball rolling (flowing down) the flow path. A guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) for guiding to the region; Eteiru. The flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall by the closed opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is open, the flow path is formed when the opening / closing member is closed. Through the space, the game ball is configured to win the winning area, the stay area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the opening and closing member, and has a plurality of communication ports that communicate with the flow path The game ball guided by the guiding section and flowing from the flow channel through one of the plurality of communication ports (the entrance 37g1) is connected to the one of the plurality of communication ports. Is configured to be able to flow out to a flow path through a different communication port (exit 37g2).

  Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a gaming board main body 80 in which a gaming area 32 in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area 32 (the present embodiment). In this case, the gaming machine includes a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80, and a game area. A prize area in which game balls flowing down 32 can enter a prize area (general winning prize opening 37d), by sliding back and forth, a closed state in which the prize areas are incapable of winning or difficult to enter a prize area, and game balls in the prize area. A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted to an open state where a game can be won, a first flow path (downflow path 37f) and a second flow path (detour path 37g) through which game balls can roll, and a first flow path. A game ball rolling (flowing down) the flow path to the second flow path Induction unit for guiding a (protruding portion 371b), and a. The first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall by the slide member when the slide member is in a closed state, and is formed in the closed state when the slide member is in an open state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to win a prize area via a space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is formed by the slide member regardless of the state of the slide member. Both ends are communication ports formed on the rear surface side, and both ends communicate with the first flow path, and are guided by the guiding portion and flowed in from the first flow path through one communication port (the inlet 37g1) of the both ends. The game sphere is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path via the other communication port (exit 37g2) of the two ends.

  That is, the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a detour path 37g (residence area, second flow path) is added to the downflow path 37f (flow path, first flow path). By adding the detour 37g in this way, the staying time of the game ball staying on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening / closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when there is no detour 37g. Therefore, it is easy for the game balls to win in the winning opening (in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 37d), and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game balls in a predetermined game state (the time saving state in the present embodiment). Is possible, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the normal fluctuation winning device 37 having the game ball staying function is provided in the right game area (the area on the right of the center case 40 in the game area 32), the player can play the game balls in the right game area. The rolling mode can be enjoyed. Further, in the present embodiment, the front decoration member 371 is made of a material that can transmit light, and the rolling state of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 can be sufficiently visually recognized. The rolling mode of the game ball can be more enjoyed.

  The variable winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the normal variable winning device 37 but may be changed as appropriate. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, for example, the variable winning device is a device in which a detour 37g (residence area, second flow path) is added to the downflow path 38f (flow path, first flow path) of the special variable winning apparatus 38. You may. Further, the opening / closing member that can be converted into the closed state in which the winning opening is closed and the open state in which the winning opening is opened is not limited to the slide member, and can be appropriately changed. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13A, for example, a sliding member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes a winning opening by sliding forward and backward is provided as an opening and closing member. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 13B, a turning member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes a winning opening by turning around a turning axis Z may be used.

  Further, the staying area for staying the game balls is not limited to the detour 37g (second flow path) and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the staying area is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not separated, that is, a space in which a partition 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the bypass 37g is removed from the bypass 37g. Alternatively, the space may be a space in which a part other than the front end part (part separating the entrance 37g1 and the exit 37g2) of the partition 373k is removed from the detour 37g.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of game balls flowing from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour path 37g) via one communication port (entrance 37g1) is determined by the other communication port. The ratio of the game balls flowing from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour path 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2) is higher than the flow rate of the game balls, and one of the communication balls is connected to the slide member (movable member 37b). It is possible to provide a configuration in which a height difference (in the case of the present embodiment, a step or an inclination) is provided such that the mouth is arranged at a position higher than the other communication opening. With this configuration, the game ball can smoothly roll on the first flow path (downflow path 37f) or the second flow path (detour path 37g), and thus the first flow path and the second flow path. Can prevent clogging of the ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, on the upper surface of the slide member (the movable member 37b), in order to suppress the power of the game ball rolling in the first flow path (the downflow path 37f) or the second flow path (the detour path 37g). (In the case of the present embodiment, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left protrusion 37b6, and the right protrusion 37b7). With such a configuration, the staying time of the game ball staying on the upper surface of the slide member (the movable member 37b) can be further extended, so that the predetermined game state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state). ), It is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, as the ball power suppressing portion, an initiating portion (projecting portion) such as the lower wall protruding portion 37b5, the upstream front wall protruding portion 371d, or the rear wall protruding portion 373d is provided on the downflow path 37f, and the detour path 37g is provided. Although raised portions (convex portions) such as the left protruding ridge portion 37b6, the right protruding ridge portion 37b7, and the intermediate protruding portion 373k1 are provided, the ball-power suppressing portion is not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed. In addition, as a ball-power suppressing portion, a downward portion (recess) may be provided in the downflow path 37f or the detour 37g. Specifically, for example, a meandering groove may be formed as a fold on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, and the game ball may roll while meandering along the groove. Further, as a ball power suppressing portion, an ups and downs (both up and down portions) may be provided in the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g so that the game ball rolls while meandering or the like due to the ups and downs. Further, the power suppressing portion is not limited to the raised portion (convex portion) or the recessed portion (recessed portion), and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the staying device having the game ball staying function (ordinary fluctuation winning device 37), in the game area 32, a member that suppresses the ball (obstacle nail, windmill, downflow path 615, guide section 616) Etc.), that is, a staying member having a game ball staying function is provided. Therefore, the game ball can be stayed in the right game area by the stay device and the stay member, so that the rolling mode of the game ball in the right game area can be more enjoyed. In addition, a method of retaining game balls by providing irregularities on the surface, a method of retaining game balls by using a material having a high friction coefficient, and a method of performing a certain operation by a driving force of a driving source (such as a solenoid). A predetermined member or device may have a game ball retaining function by a method of retaining a ball, a method of retaining a game ball by providing a distribution device, or the like.

  In addition, since the normal variable winning device 37 can cause the game ball to stay in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 by the starting portion and the detour 37g, a staying member (a staying device other than the normal variable winning device 37 may be used). ) Is preferably configured to allow the game balls to stay in a direction other than the front-rear direction (the left-right direction or the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10). As a result, the gaming machine can be retained three-dimensionally by the retaining member (and / or the retaining device other than the ordinary variable winning device 37) and the ordinary variable winning device 37, so that the retaining time can be increased. And the interest in rolling game balls is improved.

  In addition, the exit 30c, the general winning opening 35, and the like (hereinafter, referred to as “the exit 30c”) may be provided in the middle of the detour 37g. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not a game ball that fails to win a prize in the normal variable prize device 37 is to come out of the normal variable prize device 37. It is possible to adjust so that the rate does not become too large, and to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the bypass 37g.

  In the case where the out port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the detour 37g, a game ball may flow into the out port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion of the movable member 37b that forms the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (or may be in the closed state), the positions of the through-hole 37b11 and the out-port 30c in the vertical direction coincide (the through-hole 37b11 is located immediately above the out-port 30c). ), The game balls on the movable member 37b can flow into the out port 30c, and when the movable member 37b is in the closed state (or may be in the open state), the vertical movement between the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c. The positions in the directions do not match (the through hole 37b11 is displaced from immediately above the out port 30c), so that the game balls on the movable member 37b cannot or cannot flow easily into the out port 30c. is there.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to generate. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, which has a power failure monitoring circuit and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal and the like.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information on the game even if a power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and can resume the game based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. Of game information storage and holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariably information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, and the like) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a fluctuation pattern table for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for determining the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory by the CPU 111A. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 is controlled overall. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generation circuit for generating random numbers for determining a variation pattern for determining reach and non-reach variable display, including a running time of a variable display game, and a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game. And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock for giving an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, in the process related to the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of start storages. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the ordinary variable winning device 37. 37a, a start opening 3 switch 97a in the second start winning opening 97, a winning opening switch 35a, and a plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) large winning opening switches arranged in the special variable winning device 38. 38a, connected to the gate switches 34a in the normal starting gate 34, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided for converting the data into the data. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that a lead wire of a sensor or a proximity switch is incorrectly short-circuited, a sensor or a switch is disconnected from a connector, or a lead wire is cut to be floating. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the special winning port switch 38a and the gate switch 34a are the second input Input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to a not-shown test test device via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). A signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), an abnormal payout status signal (a status signal indicating abnormal payout), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the input signal and supplying the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs a second winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a second opening / closing data for the general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37. An output port 134 is provided. The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output section 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to an opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 is output to the output unit 130. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning port 97 The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are provided with a coil for detecting magnetism, and detect a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. The glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 and the like include micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a timekeeping unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, and the like) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 includes a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. In addition, even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for controlling the drive of the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for detecting the detection signal and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, transition (transition) of a game state by game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a transition of the game state in the present embodiment. The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first specific game state ST2, a second specific game state ST3, and a third specific game state ST4. In addition, other special game states include a first special game state based on a first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on a second special result (small hit), but are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, an effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, The main starting area, which is the starting area to be targeted, the main fluctuation special figure, which is the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are determined.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim at a prize in the first starting winning opening 36 by left-handing, and to aim at a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 and the second starting winning opening 97 by right-handed. I can do it. That is, it is possible to select a starting area to be aimed at by a player's intention. In addition, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one special figure variable display game that is determined to be the main in the design. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each game state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

  The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low, and there is no Tokuden support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 to facilitate prize winning. This is a state in which there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The main starting area is a first starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change. As described later, in the normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. .

  The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is a high probability state, and a state in which there is a general-purpose support for improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a public figure support, there is also a reduction in the time required to reduce the change time of the special figure change display game or the normal figure change display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a chance mode. The main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but the main starting area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change. In the first specific game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and the time is right-handed to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special figure 1 is displayed. It is more advantageous for the player to play the variable display game. The second specific game state ST3 is the same as the first specific game state ST2 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

  In the third specific game state ST4, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no Toden support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display. This is a state in which there is time to reduce the fluctuation time of the game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 1 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

  In the third specific game state ST4, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and the time is right-handed to aim at the second start winning opening 97, and the special figure Playing the two-variation display game is more advantageous for the player. In the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit probability is higher than the special figure 1 variable display game, and the small hit is more likely to be won than the big hit. It occurs at a high frequency and the ball held by the player increases. Since the small hit occurs at a high frequency, the effect mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

  Of these four gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because of the presence of the ordinary power support. Since the first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, the normal game state ST1 and the second specific state are provided. This is a more advantageous state for the player than the gaming state ST3. Furthermore, since the third specific game state ST4 is a state in which the number of balls held by the player increases due to frequent small hits, the player is more than the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, and the second specific game state ST3. This is an advantageous state for

  The transition of the game state is performed by terminating the special game state based on the derivation of the special result and by exhausting the specified number of games. Basically, if the special result that has triggered the start of the special game state is a probable big hit to be a high probability state after the end of the special game state, the special game state shifts to the first specific game state ST2, In the case of a normal big hit in which the low probability state is set after the end of the gaming state, the process shifts to the second specific gaming state ST3.

  If the first special result is not derived from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3 and the special figure variable display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support), the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the first specific game state ST2, if the first special result is not derived from the end of the special game state and the special figure change display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support), the process shifts to the third specific game state ST4. . In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, since the effect mode is the same chance mode, if it is not possible to determine the special result, it is difficult for the player to know which game state he is staying in. is there.

  Stay in the third specific game state ST4 until the next derivation of the first special result. By providing the third specific game state ST4, it is possible to provide a period in which the player's possession ball is increased by a small hit before the special game state based on the big hit is started. With the increase in the number of balls held and the subsequent increase in the number of balls held in the special game state, many benefits can be provided to the player. In particular, the situation in which the game can shift to the third specific game state ST4 is a so-called fit in which the next big hit is not derived even if the special figure change display game is executed 100 times after the special game state based on the probability change big hit is completed. In this state, it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that a big hit is not derived by making it possible to give a profit to the player in such a situation. On the other hand, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the fitting state, which is not present in conventional gaming machines.

  The normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a game ball retaining function of retaining game balls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, so that the game balls are placed on the movable member 37b while the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball can be swallowed (the game ball staying on the movable member 37b can be dropped and made to enter the general winning opening 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the ordinary variable prize device 37, that is, the number of game balls that have not arrived at the ordinary variable prize port 37d despite arriving at the ordinary variable prize device 37.

  In addition, since the second starting winning opening 97 is provided below the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can enter the second starting winning opening 97. . In the case of the present embodiment, the number of game balls that fail to win a prize in the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is reduced by the game ball stagnation function of the normal fluctuation prize device 37. In the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3), it is possible to make it difficult to win the second starting winning opening 97.

  Since the main starting area of the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3 is the general winning opening 37d, and the main starting area of the third specific gaming state ST4 is the second starting winning opening 97, the first specific In the case of the gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3, that is, in the high / low probability support state, it is impossible (difficult) to win the second starting winning opening 97, and in the case of the third specific gaming state ST4, It is preferable that a prize can be awarded in the second start winning opening 97 only when there is no high probability support. In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, if a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs, the payout rate may greatly deviate from the design value.

The winning rate of the normal variable winning device 37 can be calculated using the following equation (1).
Winning rate [%] = Number of game balls that have won the general winning opening 37d / Number of game balls that have arrived at the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (game balls that have flowed into the starting point of the downflow path 37f) × 100 (1) )
In the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 97 is located at the lower right of the game area 32, and the normal variable winning device 37 is located above the second starting winning opening 97. Since the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball staying function, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37. Furthermore, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to the start of the operation, and the staying time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the game ball rolls from the start point to the end point of the downflow path 37f) ), The failure of the prize to the ordinary variable prize device 37 in the state of hitting the ordinary figure is reduced to almost zero, that is, the failure to the normal variable prize device 37 in the state of hitting the regular figure. The winning rate can be made almost 100%. By setting the winning rate of the ordinary variable prize device 37 in the state of hitting the ordinary figure to almost 100%, it is possible to make it difficult to win the second starting prize port 97 disposed below the ordinary variable prize device 37. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the intended performance (ball-out rate).

  On the other hand, when the high probability support is absent (third specific game state ST4), since the ordinary variable prize device 37 is not opened, a game ball can be won to the second start winning opening 97, and a small hit RUSH is realized. can do. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second starting winning opening 97 can be configured to be awarded only when the high probability support is absent (the third specific gaming state ST4), and the desired performance can be realized. .

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the time of the ordinary figure change (ie, the ordinary figure change time) is 200 ms, and the time of the ordinary figure stop (ie, the ordinary figure display time) is 100 msec. The time of the normal power operation (ie, the sum of the total normal power release time and the total wait time per normal touching state) is 5800 ms, and the ending time (ie, the normal power remaining sphere). When the sum of the processing time and the ordinary figure ending time is 700 ms, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 ms (= 700 ms + 200 ms + 100 ms). In this case, the length of the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the ups and downs provided in the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g are appropriately designed, and the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to 1000 ms. , It is possible to make the winning rate of the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the state of hitting the ordinary figure almost 100%.

  Of course, as in the example shown here, according to the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation, the prize winning rate to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 in the hit state of the ordinary figure becomes almost 100%. Alternatively, the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation prize device 37 may be set, or, conversely, the normal fluctuation prize device 37 in the state of hitting the ordinary figure according to the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation prize device 37. The time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation may be set so that the prize winning rate becomes almost 100%.

  That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is changed to a time corresponding to the other (substantially the same as the other). Time, the other time or the like), it is possible to increase the winning rate of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37. In addition, by increasing the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by increasing a portion that suppresses the power of the ball such as the rising portion or the protruding portion, during the normal power interval (from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the operation of the movable member 37b). Until the start), more game balls can be retained on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is opened, the game balls retained on the movable member 37b can be won. Therefore, the winning rate of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 is improved. Conversely, by extending the normal figure fluctuation time from the time shown in FIG. 22 (a), it is possible to have a possibility of winning the second starting winning opening 97 at a fixed rate.

  In the present embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retaining function, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 are disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the second starting winning opening 97 or the special variable winning device 38 is set to be longer than when the normal variable winning device 37 does not have the game ball retaining function. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a hitting method that is not recommended, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the special winning opening (opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990).

  In the normal gaming state ST1, left-handing is recommended, but in the normal gaming state ST1, when right-handed and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. In the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set to be longer than in the second specific game state, but by aiming (stopping, timing, and the like), the special winning opening is achieved. It is possible to aim for a prize. If the normal variable prize device 37 disposed above the special variable prize device 38 does not have the game ball staying function, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state ST1. By aiming at the start of the small hitting game state (starting to open the big winning opening) and starting to hit the game ball, the game ball arrives at the special variable prize device 38 by the end of the small hitting game state and ends. It becomes possible to make a prize to a winning opening. Therefore, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal gaming state ST1, there is a possibility that an unrecommended hitting method (right hitting) may be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable prize device 37 disposed above the special variable prize device 38 has a game ball retaining function, the game ball arrives at the special variable prize device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, even if the player hits the game ball at the start of the small hitting game state (the opening of the special winning opening) and starts to hit the game ball, Cannot reach the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hitting game state. Therefore, since it is useless to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, it is not recommended to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, that is, it is not recommended in the normal game state ST1. It is possible to avoid being hit. As described above, according to the present embodiment, an illegal prize due to capture, that is, a small hit is generated by right-handing in the normal gaming state ST1, and a small hit prize is performed by aiming (a small winning prize port during the small hit period). Winning) can be prevented.

  Further, when the normal variable winning device 37 disposed above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball staying function, illegal winning due to capture is prevented (a method of hitting that is not recommended is avoided. For this reason, it was necessary to limit the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, for example, by performing a short opening only once. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable prize device 37 disposed above the special variable prize device 38 has a game ball retaining function, the game ball arrives at the special variable prize device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, even if the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times during the small hitting game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winnings due to capture, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting game state. it can.

  Here, for example, the normal variable prize device 37 disposed above the special variable prize device 38 does not have a game ball staying function, and arrives at the special variable prize device 38 after the game ball is launched. It takes about 2 seconds to complete. In such a case, if the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. Even if the player hits the ball at the start of the game state, such as starting to hit the game ball, by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable prize winning device 38, the small hitting game state is over. I can't win.

  On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. .5 seconds open state → 1.0 seconds closed state → 0.5 seconds open state ”, the small hitting game state is achieved by performing an aim hit such as starting to hit the game ball at the start of the small hitting game state. The game ball can reach the special variable prize winning device 38 by the end of the game, so that the game ball can win the big winning opening. Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern or the like in which the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, the illegal winning due to capture cannot be prevented. On the other hand, adopting an opening pattern or the like in which the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times as the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, that is, increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting gaming state. Can improve the small hit performance (increased payouts in the small hit game state), but cannot be realized by illegal winning due to capture.

  In order to both prevent illegal winning due to capture and improve small hitting performance, a staying device that delays the time from when the game ball is fired until it reaches the special variable winning device 38 (the present embodiment) In this case, it is assumed that a normal fluctuation winning device 37) is provided. If a delay of 2 seconds is given by the staying device (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it takes about 4 seconds from when the game ball is launched until it reaches the special variable winning device 38.

  As a result, the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. In the case of the pattern of “→ 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state”, 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds) until the operation of the opening / closing member 990 is completed. Second + 0.5 second), while it takes about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38. That is, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the special variable winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start of the operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hitting game state to the end of the operation. In addition, the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 can be determined according to the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hitting game state (opening pattern of the big winning opening).

  Rather than the time from the start of operation of the opening / closing member 990 to the end of operation in the small hitting game state (3.5 seconds in this example), the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (this time) By increasing the length of about 4 seconds in the example, even if the player hits the game ball at the start of the small hitting game state and starts hitting the game ball, by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38, the small hitting game is started. The state has ended. Therefore, even if an opening pattern in which the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hitting game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing a stagnation device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from when the game ball is launched to when it reaches the special variable prize device 38, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. , Small hit performance can be improved. Further, as the delay time is longer, the total time of the small hitting game state can be extended, so that the small hitting performance can be improved. In addition, the longer the delay time is, the longer it takes to arrive at the special variable prize winning device 38, the more difficult it is to win illegally due to capture. Providing such a stagnation device is effective not only for aiming during normal power support but also for aiming during small hit RUSH. In addition, the longer the delay time, the more difficult it is to aim and hit, so it is necessary to keep hitting, and stable data can be obtained even in the operation of the hall.

  Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, a right hit is made and the second starting winning opening 97 is won, and a small hit occurs. When the figure hits, the game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can be reduced by the game ball staying function of the normal variable winning device 37, so that it is disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. The special variable prize winning device 38 can be made difficult to win. That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes a long time for the game balls to reach the special variable winning device 38 by the game ball retaining function of the normal variable winning device 37, so that it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. Further, by the game ball staying function of the ordinary variable prize device 37, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the ordinary variable prize device 37 (it is difficult to make the special variable prize device 38 win), so that the illegal prize due to capture is obtained. Damage can be minimized.

  In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, it is possible to not only improve the small hitting performance (increase the number of payouts in the small hitting game state) but also open the large winning opening 38d. Since the number of times can be increased, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball flows into the special winning opening 38d, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, as a time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable prize winning device 38, about 2 seconds when there is no staying device, and about 4 seconds when there is a staying device. The arrival time is an average value of the actually measured values, and there is an error in the actual arrival time.

  In addition, the alert (error notification) performed when the player hits right in the normal game state may be performed when a condition that a predetermined number of game balls have won the second start winning opening 97 is satisfied. This may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the general-purpose starting gate 34, or when the number of game balls that have won the second starting winning opening 97 and the general-purpose starting gate 34 have passed. This may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. In this way, it is possible to avoid such inconveniences that the player is immediately alerted to the right-handed by mistake and the interest is reduced, and the desire to play the game is reduced. Further, in the normal game state, the counter for counting the game balls that have won the second start winning opening 97 and the counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the general-purpose start gate 34 are configured to be cleared at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be configured such that -1 is updated every time the first winning port 36 is won.

  FIG. 23 shows the probability of the big hit and the small hit, the big hit type distribution probability when the big hit is won, and the small hit type distribution probability when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device (first special result), and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device (second special result). The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

  The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and the probabilities in the low-probability state normal gaming state and the high-probability state specific gaming state are shown in FIG. The probability is as shown in FIG. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured to be in the high probability state after the end of the special game state based on the probability change big hit (first special game state). Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. The small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and the small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit do not win twice.

  FIG. 23 (c) shows the types of big hits that can be selected in the special figures 1 and 2, and the distribution probabilities of each type of big hit, and FIG. Possible small hit types, the opening time, the number of times of each small hit type, and the distribution probability are shown. The small hit may not be provided in the special figure 1 but may be set only in the special figure 2.

  24 and 25 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 24A shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is out of order in the normal game state (low probability state). In the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation. Regarding the special figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected so that the player proceeds with the game according to this design, regardless of which variation pattern is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 variable display game. The execution of the variable display game in FIG. 2 is made inefficient in time, and in the normal game state, the player plays the special figure 1 variable display game mainly.

  FIG. 24B shows a variation pattern in a case where the result is out of the specific game state (the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4). In this case, as the variation pattern without reach in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the variation pattern in which the variation time is shorter than in the normal game state is selected. In addition, for the special figure 2 variable display game, only the variable pan without reach can be selected. In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the main fluctuation, and in the third specific game state ST4, the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main fluctuation. Further, in the specific game state, the time saving state is shorter than that in the normal game state.

  FIG. 25A shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is a big hit in the normal game state. For the special figure 2, only the variation pattern that does not cause the reach state can be selected. In the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is longer than the variable time selectable when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit.

  FIG. 25B shows a variation pattern in a case where the result is a big hit in the specific game state (the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4). For the special figure 1 change display game, a change pattern having a change time equivalent to the normal game state is selected. Further, for the special figure 2 variable display game, a change pattern of a variable time equivalent to the SP3 reach of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

  FIG. 25C shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is a small hit in the normal game state. In the special figure 2, a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set without selecting a reach state is selected. FIG. 25D shows a fluctuation pattern in a case where the result is a small hit in the specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3, third specific game state ST4). In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected.

  FIG. 26 shows special variable winning devices in a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern was shown. In the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, when the type of big hit is a 10R certain variable big hit, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1. In the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R) after a fanfare period of 5000 ms. After that, the round in which the interval period of 2000 ms and the opening period of 29000 ms are set is repeated until 10 rounds are performed, and after the ending period of 11000 ms, the special game state ends. In addition, when the type of the big hit is the 4R certain big hit or the 4R normal big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 2. This opening and closing pattern is different from the opening and closing pattern of the 10R big hit only in the number of rounds.

  Note that the time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening / closing pattern is a time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. The ending period in the special winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 11,000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the second half is the ending time.

  The opening / closing pattern of the small hit includes a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the special variable prize winning device 38 according to this. Is released. In addition, in any of the opening and closing patterns of the big hit and the small hit, when a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point. The opening time for small hits is shorter than the opening time for big hits, and the number of wins to the special variable winning device 38 in the special game state is reduced. Therefore, a small hit has a lower game value that can be given to a player than a big hit. That is, the special result includes a first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and a second special game state that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. A possible second special result (small hit) is included.

  In the small hit opening / closing pattern, the length of the fanfare period and the ending period differ depending on whether or not the game is in the third specific game state, and is longer in the third specific game state. In the third specific game state, these times are ensured in order to perform effects such as notification of small hits and notification of the number of prize balls by winning. In addition, since small hits occur frequently in the third specific game state, the time required for digesting the special game state is lengthened by lengthening the fanfare period and the ending period, so that the number of prize balls per unit time does not become too large. I have to. Further, the opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not the game is in the third specific game state. Here, in the opening / closing pattern for each small hit, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to perform multiple opening. In this case, the same applies to the interval time at which the special fluctuation winning device 38 is temporarily closed, regardless of whether the game is in the specific game state.

  Although both the length of the fanfare period and the length of the ending period are made different depending on whether or not the game is in the third specific game state, only one of them may be made different. Also, one or both of the length of the fanfare period and the ending period may be made different depending on whether or not the big hit opening / closing pattern is in the third specific game state.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. In addition, when there is no distinction between the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When a big hit (first special result) and a small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when there is no distinction between the first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit and the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply referred to as a special game state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by a turning member such as an obstacle nail or a windmill arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening. 36, the normal fluctuation prize device 37, the second start prize port 97, and the special fluctuation prize device 38, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and are discharged from the game area 32. When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning award device 37, the second starting winning award 97, and the special variable winning award device 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that is won. The prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 19) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and fires (so-called left-hits) a game ball to the left game area to cause the first start winning opening 36 or the first start winning opening 36. The player can aim for a prize at the general prize port 35 disposed on the left side of the game, and fires a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), thereby setting the general-purpose starting gate 34 and the normal variable prize device 37, The variable winning device 38, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 disposed above the second starting winning opening 97 can be aimed at winning.

  The winning ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the internally provided starting port 1 switch 36a or starting port 2 switch 37a. One start memory is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In the state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first starting memory number is 0, when a game ball wins in the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the starting right is generated. Accordingly, the first start memory is stored, the first start storage number is incremented by one, and the special figure 1 change display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. The number is decremented by one. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. When a game ball wins in the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, if the first starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first starting memory number is incremented by one and the first starting memory is one. Will be remembered. Then, in a state where the first start storage number has become 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by one, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  The winning ball to the second starting winning port 97 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a starting port 3 switch 97a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or a special game state. Even if a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97, the second start memory is not generated. Note that if a winning in the second start winning opening 97 occurs in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, a second start memory is temporarily generated for the sake of processing, but the second start memory is not stored. Since the game is immediately consumed, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

  At the time of detection of the starting winning ball, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are respectively extracted as start storage information, and the extracted random numbers are stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 19). In the special map storage area (part of the RAM), a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first start memory) is stored as the special map start memory. Then, the storage number of the special figure start storage is displayed on the storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first start memory, and based on the winning in the second start winning opening 97, The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the FIG. 2 display 52 (second variable display device). The special figure variable display game and the special figure variable display game can be executed at the same time. However, while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has the first special result (big hit) or the second special figure variable display game. When two special results (small hits) are obtained, the one special figure change display game is ended as a result other than the special result (missing result).

  That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 sets the special map based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 37d (first starting winning region) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning region). The first execution control means performs execution control of the one-variation display game (the first special-figure variation display game). Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area). A second execution control means for performing the execution control of

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the fluctuation display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. Jackpot and a first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, a special result mode (small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. Becomes a small hit and a second special game state (so-called small hit state). In other words, the special figure 1 display 51 can display the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It forms a display means. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball into the second starting winning opening 97.

  In addition, after the big hitting game state (first special game state) is over, the game control device (game control means) 100 sets a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the hit probability is high, It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with the support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms a specific game state generation means.

  In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, a decorative special figure change in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numerals, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device 41. The display game is executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. And these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the fluctuation display is performed in accordance with the fluctuation of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game.

  That is, the display variation display game (variable display game) in which the display device 41 variably displays the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). (A decoration special figure variation display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but when the normal game state is a low probability state, the variable time is set as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) length variations are selected. As a result, in the normal game state, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is temporally inefficient, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at small win in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a special figure 1 variable display game by aiming at the first starting winning opening 36 by performing a left-hand shot. The time of the long fluctuation is about 10 minutes, but may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  From the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37), and the result of the game is the special result. A game control means (game control device 100) for comprehensively controlling the game in the gaming machine 10 which generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the player becomes a player, and a special variable prize winning device opened in the special game state. (Special fluctuation winning device 38), and the game control means includes a fanfare period from the start of the special game state to the start of opening of the special fluctuation winning device, and the last special fluctuation winning device in the special game state. Ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening of the game to the end of the special game state, can be set, and even if the special game state is based on the same special result, The fact that as it is possible to vary the one or both of the length of the fanfare period and ending period according to the game state when the fruit was derived. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, a first starting winning opening 36 serving as a starting winning opening, a normal variable winning device 37, a second starting winning opening 97 forming a starting winning opening, and a game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing the first variable display game based on the winning of the game, and the second variable display game based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening 97. Second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and a specific game state (third specific game state) in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state Game state generating means (game control device 100), wherein the game control means sets a special length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special game state based on the same special result. The fact that the game state when the fruit was derived was such that as better if the gaming state when the special result was derived than not the specific gaming state is a specific game state becomes longer. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, in the specific game state, the time for executing the effect can be secured, and when the game is not in the specific game state, the game can be rapidly advanced.

  In addition, the special result includes a first special result that can change the probability derived according to the game state, and a second special result that has a constant probability derived regardless of the game state, The probability that the second special result is derived is set to be higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different for the second special result that does not change the probability, the execution mode can be changed without changing the derived probability.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 27, first, processing for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer that is a head address of an area for saving values of registers and the like is generated. Is performed (step X2). Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and an upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step X4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is executed. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can be prevented from dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that the initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if such a troublesome operation is not performed, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process measures the standby time and monitors the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12). First, a power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via a port and a data bus to set the number of times of checking (for example, two times) (step X8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step X9). If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the load on control can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the timer value is 0 is determined. Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), And outputs the OFF data to all the output ports (sets no output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15), and read first. It is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If (Step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (Step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and power failure (Step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the flow shifts to step X21 in FIG. 28 to perform the processing in the case where the power supply has been normally restored.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X25 in FIG. 28 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make

  In step X21 of FIG. 28, an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  Thereafter, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). Go to X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in the normal processing to be described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed or is not in the special game state, the customer is waiting for the customer. Send the command for the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step X25), and all areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X27). Then, an initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step X28). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demonstration screen, and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) , A plurality of commands are transmitted. In addition, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command and a support number information command which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variable display game with ordinary power support are also transmitted.

  In step X30, a process of starting a timer interrupt signal and a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X30, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of transposing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to make any setting.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, a random number for determining a special symbol hit symbol) After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X32), interruption is permitted (step X33). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X34) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” which is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are a timer interrupt process which is a processing unit of the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (a different CTC (CTC2) from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing). In addition, the so-called "initial value changing method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round is adopted for the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in a range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step X34, the number of times (for example, two) to check by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X35). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step X34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step X33) before the initial value random number updating process (step X34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  The initial value random number updating process in step X34 includes a method of performing an initial value random number updating process in a timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt, as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only the main process is performed, there is no problem if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step X37; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step X36). Further, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step X37; Y), that is, when it is determined that the power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily prohibiting the interruption (step X38) A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step X39) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X40), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X41). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off (step X42) and a process of saving the calculated checksum (step X43), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step X44). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control apparatus when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

  In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) stores a RAM 111C that can store data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C, and reads the operation state of the initialization means before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, the interrupt routine is started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 29 is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) are performed.

  Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. When a signal for stopping the firing is output in step X5 of the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing the output process, and the firing permitting signal is set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step X105) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (Step X105), a random number update process 1 (Step X106), and a random number update process 2 (Step X107) are performed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the winning port switch 38a, setting of the prize ball, A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) for monitoring errors such as opening of the front frame and the glass frame and illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, a start-up switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a, the start-up 2 switch 37a, and the start-up 3 switch 97a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, and the second starting winning port 97. Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) for performing the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) for performing the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and the processing related to the general figure variable display game are performed. The general-purpose game process to be performed (step X112) is performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step X113) for driving the segment LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61 Inspection of magnet fraud (step X114) for checking the detection signal from the controller to determine whether there is any abnormality, and fraudulent board radio for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality. A monitoring process (step X115) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X116) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a starting port 1 (first starting winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquiring process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start-port winning information set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the first starting winning port 36 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X493).

  If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, if the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X494). If it is in the normal gaming state (step X494; Y), the flow shifts to step X497. When the game is not in the normal gaming state (step X494; N), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496). Thereafter, a table for setting the information of the holding by the starting port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the right-turn instruction notification command, the right-turn instruction is instructed to instruct the player to make a right-turn by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in a specific game state or a special game state, the right-handed player is more advantageous for the player, and the first starting winning port 36, which is configured not to win a prize unless left-handed, is in a specific game state or a special one. When a winning is detected during the gaming state, a right-hand instruction is notified.

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X499), and a hard random number obtaining process is performed (step X500). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on the presence of a start opening winning set in step S501.

  If the start opening winning information has not been set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; N), the process proceeds to step X509. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, when the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the public telephone (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is operated to be in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step X502). If the ordinary power is operating (step X502; Y), step X504 is performed. Move to On the other hand, if the public telephone is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether the public telephone fraud is occurring (step X503).

  In the determination as to whether or not the irregular fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred when the number of illegal winnings in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and a game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the counted number of illegal winnings is equal to or more than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

  In the case where unauthorized unauthorized access is occurring (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X509. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more. In addition, in the case where the unauthorized illegal operation of the telephone is not occurring (Step X503; N), it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state is being performed (Step X504). If it is not in the normal gaming state (step X504; N), the process proceeds to step X507. If the game is in the normal gaming state (step X504; Y), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting the information of the holding by the starting port 2 is prepared (step X507), the special figure starting port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the process proceeds to step X509.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the left-turn instruction notification command, a left-turn instruction notification for instructing the player to make a left-turn by the launch direction instruction display 99, voice, or the like is performed. When the player is in the normal game state, the left-handed player is more advantageous for the player, and the player does not win unless the player hits the right-hand side. The batting instruction is notified.

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting opening 3 (second starting winning opening 97) (step X509), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X510). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start-port winning information that is set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X511).

  If the information on the presence of the start opening winning has not been set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; N), the start opening switch monitoring process ends. In this case, the information on no start-up winning is set. On the other hand, when the information on the presence of the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; Y), it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state is being performed (step X512). And when it is not in the normal game state (step X512; N), it moves to step X515. When the game is in the normal gaming state (step X512; Y), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step X513), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X514). After that, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 3 is prepared (step X515), the special figure starting port 3 switch processing is performed (step X516), and the starting port switch monitoring processing is ended.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the left-turn instruction notification command, a left-turn instruction notification for instructing the player to make a left-turn by the launch direction instruction display 99, voice, or the like is performed. When the player is in the normal gaming state, the left-handed player is more advantageous for the player, and when a winning is detected in the normal gaming state at the second starting winning opening 97 which is configured not to win if the player does not right-handed. The left-handed instruction is notified.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step X498) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing. In this special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, the starting port signal 1 output count, which is the number of times information on the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. Then, the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step X523). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output number area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) Is smaller than the upper limit (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is looped to 0 by updating +1 and the value after the update is not saved.

  If the number of special figure 1 reservations is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for allocating a fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination processing described later is set ( In step X526, the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of a random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the above-described hard random number acquisition processing is converted to the big hit random number of RWM. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Then, the big hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X534), which is the pre-reading processing, is performed to prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step X535), and the effect command setting processing is performed (step X535). Step X536), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing ends.

  Note that the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (step X508) in the starting port switch monitoring processing described above includes, in steps X521 to X524 relating to the starting port signal, information on the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the gaming machine 10 The process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 31 except that the process is performed on the starting port signal 2 output to the external management device. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and uses the predetermined random number as the first starting memory as the predetermined starting memory. The first start storage means can store up to the upper limit number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure holding information determination processing (step X534) in the above-described special figure starting port 1 switch processing. The same processing is performed in the special figure starting port 2 switch processing not shown. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing of determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start storage before the start timing of the special figure 1 change display game based on the special figure 1 start storage. In this special figure reservation information determination processing, first, a big hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is determined based on whether or not the big random number value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). If the result of the determination is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a small hit based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). If the result of the determination is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step X548; N), stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X550), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to stop symbol information (step X551), effect command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, a special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

  Then, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X556), and terminates the special figure suspension information determination processing. The special figure 1 information setting processing in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing in step X554 are processing executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the special figure 1 ordinary processing. Is the same as

  By the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 start-up memory based on the special figure 1 start-up storage and the information on the change pattern in the special figure 1 start-up display game based on the special figure 1 start-up storage are included. A prefetch variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a small hit or the type of a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is stored in the special figure 1 fluctuation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. The effect can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game. In particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

  That is, the game control device 100 can determine the result and the variation mode information of the first variable display game before the start of the first variable display game based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage unit. It forms a possible first determining means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start winning storage device (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Or the like). In addition, the timing at which the random number value stored corresponding to the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning that the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

  Note that this special figure suspension information determination processing is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game which does not generate a start memory for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Further, when the game is in the third specific game state, the pre-reading process may not be performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed during the third specific game state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly performed by deriving a special result in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped as a result of a miss. In other words, the notice of the pre-read result is not meaningful because most of the results are missed, or the foreseeing result, which is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game, is forcibly changed to the off-result after being notified, so that the advance notice and This is because a contradiction may occur.

  However, the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate a start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. There is a high possibility that only the one-variation display game is played, and in such a case, a prefetch effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memories that perform such prefetching effects, those that occur before the start of the third specific game state are used for those that occur before the start of the third specific game state, and are used after the start of the third specific game state. For those that have been subjected to such a prefetch effect, prefetch processing is performed. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed irrespective of the probability state, and it may be determined in another process whether or not to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process.

[Special figure starting port 3 switch processing]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure startup port 3 switch processing (step X516) in the above-described startup port switch monitoring processing. In this special figure starting port 3 switch process, first, the starting port signal 3 output count, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the second starting winning port 97 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. Then, the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step X563). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the start-up port signal 3 output count area of the RWM (step X564), and the start-up port 3 (second start winning port 97) wins Determine whether it is invalid.

  The starting port 3 winning invalid is defined as a special result (big hit or small hit) during the stoppage of the special figure 1 variable display game (during a special figure displaying process described later), during the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 change display game is being executed. When the winning opening 3 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure starting opening 3 switch processing is terminated. If the starting port 3 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the reserved number of the special figure 2 is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). The big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Then, a big hit symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 3 switch process ends. That is, the game control device 100 forms a starting winning storage unit that extracts and stores a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 97. Note that the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2, that is, during the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. Is determined (step Y101). If the special hit 2 is not during the big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102). Step Y103). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the detection is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning in the special winning opening. A process of setting a winning opening count command and a process of closing the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are performed in the winning opening are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. As for the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in a special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the flow shifts to step Y119 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, the processing branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Is set in the register (step Y105). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is obtained (step Y106), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

  In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure 1 The special figure 1 usual processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation in FIG. 1 is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display is performed. One fluctuation process (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the big hit type and the setting of each big hit type A special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) for setting a fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “3” in step Y107, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, and the like are performed. The processing to be performed during the fanfare / interval (step Y111) is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “4”, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “5” in step Y107, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 1 A special winning port remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end process is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “6” in step Y107, the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) I do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "7" in step Y107, the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. During the small hit fanfare (step Y115), the information necessary for the setting is set. If the special figure 1 game processing number is "8" in step Y107, a small hitting middle processing (step Y116) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "9" in step Y107, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting middle processing or the small hit end A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y117) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 1 game processing number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a symbol change control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 The game processing ends. The special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control for the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

  In the special figure 2 game process, first, whether the special figure 1 is in a big hit / small hit, that is, in the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit Is determined (step Y131). If it is not during the big hit / small hit in the special figure 1 (step Y131; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y132). Step Y133). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 1 is being performed (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the detection is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning in the special winning opening. A process of setting a winning opening count command and a process of closing the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are performed in the winning opening are performed. In the special figure 2 game process, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state that is executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 1 game process described above.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the flow shifts to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 or not. Is determined (step Y135).

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the length is stored in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variation timer value (here, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing from step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent a player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game in which the small hit occurrence probability is high in the normal game state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if an upper limit is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the specified time (here, 60000 ms) is measured.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, by using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is obtained (step Y137), and a subroutine call based on the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y138, the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the special setting are performed. The special figure 2 usual processing (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during the fluctuation shown in FIG. 2 is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is performed. A process during two fluctuations (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the setting of each big hit type The special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “3” in step Y138, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y142) is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 2 A special winning port remaining sphere process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “6” in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “7” in step Y138, the opening time / opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. In the small hit fanfare processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y138, a small hitting middle processing (step Y147) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “9” in step Y138, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting middle processing, or the processing for ending the small hitting A small hit remaining ball process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game processing number is "10" in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and a pattern change control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game processing. The special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control for the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2. In the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processes will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y108) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special map 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 1 can be started (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuating display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started to change, in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 1 cannot be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 ordinary processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends. In addition, when the variation of the special figure 1 can be started (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been notified, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag has been set (step Y202). If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-turn instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the second specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

  If the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, a special figure 1 change start process for setting information related to the special figure 1 change display game is performed (step Y210), and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y211). Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step Y212). Note that at the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status change area is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure change display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed, and the special figure status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 change display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the third specific game state (step Y213). Then, when the game is in the third specific game state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the game is not in the third specific game state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 change check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a state other than the third specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display flag is set, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed during a period in which the special figure 1 variable display game is the main change. It becomes possible to confirm the execution of the game. Thereafter, the special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends.

[Tokuzu 2 usual processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y139) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special map 2 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 2 can be started (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is in a state in which the fluctuation cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 2 is not in the normal processing. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the change of the special figure 2 cannot be started (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends. If the special figure 2 can be started to change (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the winning when the special figure 2 variable display game can be started and the second starting winning opening 97 is won. This is temporarily generated to perform the start processing of the special figure variable display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

  When the number of reserved special figure 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, a special figure 2 change start process for setting information relating to the special figure 2 change display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step Y227). If it is not in the normal gaming state (step Y227; N), the process proceeds to step Y230. When the game is in the normal game state (step Y227; Y), the special figure 2 change check flag is set (step Y229). That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started during the period when the special figure 2 variable display game is irregularly changed, the special figure 2 change check flag is set. Thereby, it can be confirmed that the player intentionally executes the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs. Then, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting processing is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 ordinary processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231). If the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (step Y232; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y233). Performs processing related to settings. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y231; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y233; Y), Then, the process proceeds to Step Y237.

  In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y234), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). A command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, from the receipt of this command, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, a change start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure change display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This allows the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

  Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed after receiving this command. Thus, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the gaming state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 1 change start processing (step Y209) in the above-described special figure 1 ordinary processing. This special figure 1 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the outlier information is obtained as the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Then, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed (step Y242).

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. A 1-information setting process (step Y244) is performed to prepare a special-figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table that is a table in which various kinds of information relating to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are set. (Step Y245).

  Thereafter, a special figure 1 change pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a change pattern that is a change mode in the special figure 1 change display game is performed, and change start information setting for setting information of a change start of the special figure 1 change display game is performed. The processing (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after that, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

  The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly disconnected regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it ends. In particular, the special figure 2 variable display game has a high probability of a small hit. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, there is a high possibility that such processing is performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. . Therefore, for example, despite a high expectation effect in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss, and the player has distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to be started, measures such as preventing the effect with high expectation from being selected are taken. I can do it.

  For this purpose, first, it is determined whether the game is in the third specific game state (step Y248). If the game is in the third specific game state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. When the game is in the third specific game state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and executed at a high frequency, it is known that the special figure 1 variable display game is likely to be forcibly stopped as a result of the disconnection. In the special figure 1 variable display game, the effect is set in advance so that an effect with a high expectation is not selected, so that no special processing is performed here.

  If it is not in the third specific game state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249). If the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (step Y249; N), the process moves to step Y257. In this case, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is an extremely long fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, a process for preventing an effect with high expectation from being selected is not performed here.

  If the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether or not the result of the running special figure 2 variable display game is incorrect (step Y250). If the result is incorrect (step Y250; Y). ) Shifts to step Y257. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. If the result of the running special figure 2 variable display game is not losing (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the processing shifts to step Y257. In this case, the remaining change time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, so that an effect with high expectation is not selected. No processing is performed.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variable display to be executed from now on It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254). If the change time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining change time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, the processing for preventing the effect with high expectation from being selected is not performed.

  Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256), a support management process for managing a period for setting general-purpose support is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 change start process is ended. . This command includes information indicating whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. In the effect control device 300, based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the selection of the effect with high expectation for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is restricted or a specific execution is performed. Processing such as setting an aspect is performed.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of resetting the information on the variation pattern (the first and second variation pattern numbers and the like) may be performed, and the effect control device 300 may change the variation pattern to one that does not select an effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process of preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of Tokuzu 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

  That is, in the special figure 1 change pattern process (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100, when the change mode information including the change time of the first change display game is determined in the normal game state, the second change display game is executed. The first variation mode determining means is capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Further, the process of resetting the above-mentioned variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means. Is being executed, by referring to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information on the variation pattern is determined without changing the determined variation time of the first variation display game. A second variation mode determination unit that can be determined again is provided.

  Also, the change pattern once determined in the special figure 1 change pattern setting process (step Y246) is not changed later, but is executed when the change pattern is determined in the special figure 1 change pattern setting process (step Y246). A process (step Y254) of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 2 change start processing (step Y225) in the above-described special figure 2 ordinary processing. This special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game. First, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the deviation information is obtained as the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A big hit flag 2 setting process for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed (step Y262).

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed. A 2 information setting process (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are set. (Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting for setting information of a fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y267) is performed, a support management process for managing the period for setting the general-purpose support is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 change start process ends.

  In the special figure 2 change start processing, processing for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display game that can be executed simultaneously is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and there is little chance that the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended with a loss result. However, similarly to the special figure 1 change display game, when the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss, selection of an effect with high expectation may be restricted.

[Support management processing]
FIG. 40 shows the support management processing (steps Y240 and Y260) performed in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing. In this support management process, first, it is determined whether or not the general telephone support is being performed (step Y1521). If the general telephone support is not being performed (step Y1521; N), the support management process ends. In addition, if the telephone number is being supported (step Y1521: Y), if the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game as the telephone number support is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y1522). It is determined whether the number of times is 0 (step Y1523).

  When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1523; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure change display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (the first specific game state or the second specific game state) If the gaming state is continued), the support management process ends. In addition, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1523; Y), that is, when a special figure change display game exceeding a specified number (here, 100 times) is started from the end of the special game state, the state is in the high probability state. Is determined (step Y1524).

  If the state is not the high probability state (step Y1524; N), a signal relating to the end of working hours is first saved in the external information output data area to end the second specific game state and shift to the normal game state (step Y1525). . Here, it is set so that two big hit signals are turned off. Further, a signal related to the end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1526). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  Then, the special figure low probability, no time saving number is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1527), and the special figure low probability, no support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1528). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1529), so that the left-handed instruction is notified at the start of the next special figure variation display game, a low probability of general figure is set (step Y1531), and the support management is performed. The processing ends. As a result, the second specific gaming state ends, and the game shifts to the normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the state is the high probability state (step Y1524; Y), the special figure low probability and the no support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1530), and the ordinary figure low probability is set (step Y1531). ), End the support management process. As a result, the first specific game state ends, and the state shifts to the third specific game state. In addition, the information of the end of the general support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs a process such as a change of the effect mode based on the information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to zero. The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y275). If the big hit is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. I do. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the missed information was saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), it is determined whether or not the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit according to whether or not it is a small hit. Is performed (step Y279).

  If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y271, and the save is performed. Then (step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of the RWM to prepare it (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y295). If the big hit is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. I do. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the missed information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), whether the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value indicates whether the jackpot is a small jackpot or not. Is performed (step Y299).

  If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information has been saved in step Y291, and the save is performed. Then (step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the miss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the player has lost the lottery of the big hit. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is the high probability state (step Y313).

  If it is in the high-probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper-limit determination value during high-probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step Y316). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step Y313; N), an upper limit judgment value during the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when the big hit is not a big hit, a loss is set as a judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
FIG. 44 shows the small hit determination processing (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In the small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value which is a lower limit value of the small hit determination value and equal to or less than an upper limit determination value which is an upper limit value of the small hit determination value. In some cases, a small hit is determined. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery has been lost. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the determination is for the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step Y322).

  If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is set to the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether the value is greater than (step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if the determination is for the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y327), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step Y243) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this process. The reason why the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (step Y337), and the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol retreat area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped. The pattern is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. The decorative special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The symbol random number storage area for one small hit (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step Y263) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. The special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process for the special symbol 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number is stored in the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this process. Note that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained. The special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, an ornament special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369). If it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. After that, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y374), and the non-stop symbol pattern is stopped. The pattern is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) in the first variable display game. Is a first determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 97, and based on the predetermined random number, a result of the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game). And a second determining means for determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where a game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second start winning opening 97 is fired on the other side of the game area 32. The changed game ball is arranged at a position where a winning can be achieved, and the change mode information of the change display game includes information on a change time capable of specifying an execution time of the change display game, and in a normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is greater than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be long.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on a pattern is exemplified. By transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

  That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination unit. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control relating to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determining unit. . Also, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control on the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and the variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determination unit as control information. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has elapsed the variation time. It forms a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  Note that if the result of the special figure 2 change display game in the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is a loss or a small hit, a long change with a very long change time is set. A command indicating only a long fluctuation may be transmitted without transmitting the information about the time to the effect control device 300. In the case of a long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the command indicating the long fluctuation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuation display based on receiving the stop command. To do. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control device 300.

[Special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing (step Y216) in the special figure 1 ordinary processing. In this special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y601), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing processing transition setting processing ends.

  The initial value to be set in the symbol number area during the fluctuating special figure 1 is 0, whereby the fluctuating display starts from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 48 shows a special figure 2 change processing transition setting processing (step Y230) in the special figure 2 ordinary processing. In the special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step Y615). For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing processing transition setting processing ends.

  The initial value to be set in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 is 0, so that the variable display starts from a state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it starts from a state where all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, and if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, the variable display is started at least from a state in which the segment is turned on. You may do it. Further, the variable display may be started from a state where the same one segment is always turned on every time. In addition, the lighting mode when the change is started in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same or different.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of design confirmation output is updated by +1 (step Y621), and a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622). Performed (Step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the stop may be forcibly stopped before the change time set at the start of the change. Therefore, when the change is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. . Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). Here, a display time of 600 ms is set for a miss, 2000 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of place, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y627; Y), the flow shifts to step Y647. If the special figure 1 is not out of the way (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 change display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 2 change display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the flow shifts to step Y643. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (step Y630). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped on the result of the loss based on the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y632. If the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y630; N), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination times is updated by +1 (step Y631), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y632). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of the special figure 2 as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. The display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already being displayed, and a new display time is started.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y633), and the decorative special figure 2 out-of-design symbol command is set and prepared (step Y634), and the design command is stored in the decorative special figure 2 command area. Saving is performed (step Y635), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y636). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and processing transition setting processing 2 during special figure 2 display is performed (step Y639).

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y643), and the special figure 1 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is the small hit. Is determined (step Y644). If it is the special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. If the special figure is not a small hit (step Y644; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y645). ), The information is loaded from the special winning opening opening information area and saved in the winning opening opening information area (step Y646).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y647), and the special figure 1 in-display processing shift setting processing 1 is performed (step Y648). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting processing is performed. Perform (step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y655). Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). Here, a display time of 600 ms is set for a miss, 2000 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (step Y657). If the figure is out of special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the flow shifts to step Y677. If the special figure 2 is not out of the way (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether the special figure 1 change display game is running or not can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 change display game is not being executed (step Y658; Y), the flow shifts to step Y673. When the special figure 1 change display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 displaying process is in progress (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped with a loss result based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. If the special figure 1 is not being displayed (N in step Y660), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination number is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the process proceeds to step Y663.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and a decorative special figure 1 off design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Saving is performed (step Y665), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y666). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and the special figure 2 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit. Is determined (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the flow shifts to step Y677. If it is not the special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675). ), Load the information from the special winning opening opening information area and save it in the winning opening opening information area (step Y676).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area, saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the process shift setting process 1 during special figure 2 display is performed (step Y678). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 1 displaying processing transition setting processing 1 (step Y648) in the above-described special figure 1 changing processing. In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y681), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag relating to the stop of the change in the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) in the above-described special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 1, first, the special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y691), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as a control information of the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display in progress transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) in the above-described special figure 2 changing processing. In the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2, first, a special figure 1 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 1 display processing is set (step Y701), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

  The processing up to this point is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display-in-process shift setting processing 1, and thereafter, information for setting a result of a loss is set. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), the stop symbol number for the special figure 1 stop symbol area is saved (step Y711), and the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting processing 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 2 display in progress process setting process 2]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-described special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 2, first, a special figure 2 game processing number “2” related to the special figure 2 display processing is set (step Y721), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the change of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. The stop flag relating to the stop of the fluctuation on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 2 (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display-in-process shift setting process 1, and thereafter, information for setting a loss result is set. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big win opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), and the special symbol 2 stop symbol area is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number (step Y731). .

  By the processing of FIGS. 49 to 54 described above, when one special figure change display game has a first special result (big hit) or small hit (second special result), the other special figure change display game is compulsory. Will be stopped as a result. That is, based on the special result of the special figure 1 variable display game, a first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped on the result of the special figure 2 and the special figure 2 variable display game is changed to the special result. As a result, a second end control process in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the disconnection is performed.

  From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when performing the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). When the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variable display game performing the execution control Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means executes the first variable display game execution control means when performing the execution control of the second variable display game. When the first variable display game being controlled has a special result, the second variable display game performing the execution control can be ended as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. With this, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with a disconnection result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous fluctuation is performed. Can be

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
55 and 56 show the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether the big hit is the big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is the big hit information (step Y755). If the big hit is not the big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. If it is a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal change release command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), and a round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area and prepared (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

  Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

  Then, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the extra-monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y771). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step Y755, if the special map 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is out-of-position information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step Y787).

  If it is not in the normal gaming state (step Y787; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is provided.

  On the other hand, if the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y787; Y), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-handing is provided.

  Thereafter, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the special monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the processing shifts to the special figure 1 small hit small fanfare processing. The process (step Y797) is performed, and the process for displaying special figure 1 ends.

  If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806). FIG. 1 A normal process shift setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
FIGS. 57 and 58 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same as the special figure 1 displaying process described above, except that the special figure 2 is displayed. In the special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special map 2 judges whether the big hit is the big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815). If the big hit is not the big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. In the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device in-operation signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operation device is operated) The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y817), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is ended with the occurrence of the first special game state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), and a round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y820). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

  After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the illegal out-of-monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y831). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Further, a fanfare / interval mid-process transition setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process ends.

  On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special map 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is out-of-position information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not a normal game state is being performed (step Y847).

  If it is not in the normal gaming state (step Y847; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is provided.

  On the other hand, when the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y847; Y), a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-handing is provided.

  Then, the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the special monitoring outside flag period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the special game 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting is set. The process (step Y857) is performed, and the process for displaying special figure 2 ends.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) while the special figure 2 is changing (step Y866). FIG. 2 The normal process shift setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated.

  That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the activation of the condition device. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 59 illustrates details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776 and Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing and special figure 2 displaying processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (special symbol fluctuation time reduction state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.

  After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is executed. The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step Y876). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal state and the normal state.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), a signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the right-hand state is displayed in the gaming state display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y881).

  Thereafter, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing ends. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information related to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y797) in the above-described special figure 1 displaying processing. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, referring to the current game state, if the game state is the specific game state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time, and if it is not the specific game state, 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y857) in the above-described special figure 2 displaying processing. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing, first, “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, referring to the current game state, if the game state is the specific game state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time, and if it is not the specific game state, 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing ends. I do.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
FIG. 62 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), round winning opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and a rendering command setting processing is performed. Is performed (step Y953).

  Next, the jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y958). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

  Then, a signal relating to the opening start of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y963). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, the special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y964), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The mouth count is cleared (step Y965), and the processing during the fanfare / interval ends.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
FIG. 63 shows the special winning opening process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In this special winning opening processing, first, it is determined whether the current round is the last round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y1005). If it is not the last round (step Y1005; N), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. In the case of the last round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether it is the big hit of Toku-zu 1 (step Y1011).

  In the case of the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015). Thereafter, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during opening of the special winning opening is ended.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
FIG. 64 shows the special winning port remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the last round. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and 3 related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round when the remaining ball processing time elapses and further until the interval time elapses after the remaining ball processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period is 2000 ms, and in this interval period, the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like. Be executed.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the last round (step Y1041; Y), a jackpot end process shift setting process is performed (step Y1045), and an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1045). Y1046), 6 relating to the special figure 1 big hit end processing or the special figure 2 big hit end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the big hit of Toku-zu 1 (step Y1048). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1048). Y1050), the special winning port remaining ball processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the special winning port remaining sphere process ends.

  The ending period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the last round, when the remaining ball processing time elapses, and further, after the remaining ball processing time elapses, until the ending time elapses. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, so that the ending period is 11000 ms. Be executed.

[Big hit end process shift setting process]
FIG. 65 shows a jackpot end process shift setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described winning winning port remaining ball process. In the jackpot end processing shift setting processing, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information of the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1073). ), The information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

  Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the flag for the special winning opening information area for storing the opening information for the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the large hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end processing shift setting processing ends.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y114) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 big hit end processing, first, “0” is set as the processing number related to the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y1101), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1106), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1106). Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

  By performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, the special figure change display game can be started for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the process, the special figure 2 game display processing is started by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started more than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start earlier. Therefore, in step Y1109, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, after the game control device 100 finishes the special game state, the second variable display game execution control unit executes the second variable display game execution control unit until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the two-variation display game from being made executable.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special result is a probable big hit (step Y1110). If the special result is a probable big hit (step Y1110; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (variable time reduction state of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Next, the number with high probability and working hours is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1114), and the special figure high probability and support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1117), and the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game for setting the ordinary power support) is set. (The value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not a probability variable jackpot (step Y1110; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, signals relating to the start of the low probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Next, a low probability, time saving number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1122), and a special figure low probability, support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1125), and the signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game for setting the ordinary power support) is set. (The value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. The special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same processing except that the step Y1109 in the special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed. First, “0” is set as a process number related to the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y1131), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1132).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1133). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1136), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1136). Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special result is a probable big hit (step Y1110). If the special result is a probable big hit (step Y1139; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (specified symbol fluctuation time reduction state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Next, the number with the high probability and the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143), and the special figure high probability and support flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1146), and the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for setting the ordinary power support) is set. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 big hit end processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not a probability variation big hit (step Y1139; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, signals relating to the start of the low probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal related to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Next, a low probability, time saving number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1151), and a special figure low probability, support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Further, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1154), and a signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for setting the ordinary power support) is set. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 big hit end processing ends.

  By the special figure 1 big hit processing and the special figure 2 big hit processing, after the special game state based on the probable variable big hit is completed, the high probability state and the first specific game state with ordinary power support are set. Further, after the end of the special game state based on the normal big hit, the second specific game state with the low probability state and the ordinary power support is set. That is, after the special game state ends, the game control device 100 can set the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result among the special results to the high probability state higher than the low probability state. Make the means. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game state.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, first, a small hit opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1202). Next, a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1203). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to ON. Then, the special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1204), and the special winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, 8 for the small hitting process is set as the process number (step Y1206), and it is determined whether the small hitting type is small hit 1 (step Y1207). If the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1207; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1208), and the small hit opening time 1 (48 ms in this case) is set as the special figure 1 The game is saved in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and the processing during the small hit fanfare ends.

  If the small hit type is not small hit 1 (step Y1207; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1210), and the release time corresponding to the small hit type is set to the special figure 2 game. The processing is saved in the processing timer area (step Y1211), and the processing during the small hit fanfare ends. The opening time corresponding to the type of small hit is set to 1000 ms for small hit 2, 1200 ms for small hit 3, and 1600 ms for small hit 4.

[Small hit processing]
FIG. 69 shows the small hitting medium processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In the small hit processing, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, the OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1243), and 9 relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245). If the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1246), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is specified. The game is saved in the game processing timer area in FIG. 1 (step Y1209), and the small hit processing ends.

  If the small hit type is not 1 (step Y1245; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1248), and the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type is set. The game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1249), and the small hit processing ends. The small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type is set to 600 ms in the case of the small hit 2 and 800 ms in the case of the small hit 3 or 4.

[Small hit ball processing]
FIG. 70 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the small hit of Tokuzu 1 (step Y1271). In the case of the special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; Y), the processing number is set to 10 relating to the special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y1272), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the flow shifts to step Y1278.

  If the special hit is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 relating to the special figure 2 small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the flow shifts to step Y1278.

  Regardless of the special hits in the special maps 1 and 2, the setting of the small hit ending time (steps Y1274, Y1277) refers to the current game state, and if the specific game state is set, the small hit ending. The time is set to 1200 ms or 1400 ms, and if it is not the specific game state, the small hit ending time is set to 100 ms. As a result, the length of the ending period including the remaining ball processing time and the ending time is 2000 ms when the player is in the specific game state, and is 700 ms or 900 ms when the player is not in the specific game state.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory in-operation signal is set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 71 shows the special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 1 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1302).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the number for turning off the light is stored in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1306). ). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step Y1307). If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y1307; N), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If the player is in the normal gaming state (step Y1307; Y), a signal relating to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and a value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is saved as the special figure 2 game wait time value (step Y1314). ), The special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended.

  By saving a value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step Y1337). If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. If the player is in the normal gaming state (step Y1337; Y), a signal relating to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process will be described. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure variation display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general power winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the ordinary game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become “0” (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has elapsed or the time has already elapsed, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of obtaining a branch destination address of a process corresponding to a general-purpose game process number using the table is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the general-figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the general-figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start and the effect of the general-figure fluctuation display game are set. A general-purpose routine process (step B8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the general-figure game processing number is “1” in step B7, the general-figure change processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display processing is performed.

Also, in step B7, if the general-figure game processing number is “2”, if the result of the general-figure change display game is a hit, the setting of the general power release time according to whether or not the time saving state is in effect Or, a general-figure displaying process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the general-floor hitting process is performed.
If the general game processing number is "3" in step B7, the normal game hitting process is performed to continue the normal game hitting process or to set information necessary for performing the normal power remaining ball process. The processing (step B11) is performed.

If the general-purpose game processing number is "4" in step B7, the general-purpose remaining sphere process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose end process is performed.
If the general-purpose game process number is "5" in step B7, a general-purpose hit end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose normal process is performed.

Then, after preparing a general symbol variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the general symbol display (step B14), a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display (step B15). ) To end the ordinary map game process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, if it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B8) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the ordinary figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B301), and when the number of ordinary figure reservations is “0” (step B201; Y). ) Performs the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B322), and ends the ordinary figure ordinary processing. If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), a random number per hit, a random number per design symbol, and a figure randomized pattern are loaded from the random number storage area of the RWM (for reserved number 1) (step B301). B302), the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is made higher than the normal probability (that is, the general low probability). It is determined whether it is during the normal high probability, that is, during the time saving state (step B304).

  If it is not during the high figure probabilities (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the low figure probabilities is set (step B305), and if the high figure probabilities are high (step B304). ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of ordinary figure (step B306). Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307). If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is determined in step B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B308 (step B308).

  If the value of the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y) or if the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the hit flag is set. Loss information is saved in the area (Step B309), a loss stop symbol number is set (Step B310), and the loss symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (Step B311), and the stop symbol number is stopped. The image is saved in the symbol area (step B315).

  On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B315).

  In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of a hit at the time of low probability of public figure is 0/251, the probability of a hit at the time of high probability of public figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”. Therefore, at the time of the low probability of the normal figure, the value is shifted when the value of the hit random number is all “0” to “250”. In addition, at the time of high probability of the normal figure, a case where the value of the hit random number is any one of “1” to “250” is a hit, and a case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is a miss.

  After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316). After that, the general figure changing time corresponding to the general figure game mode state and the general figure changing pattern random number is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B317). Then, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B318), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B319), and the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by -1 (step B320).

  In other words, the process of moving up the ranks of the reserved number of ordinary drawings 2 to 4 that are suspended after the reserved number of ordinary figure 1 by one with the execution of the public figure change display game relating to the oldest reserved number of ordinary figure 1 I do. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 of ordinary figure reservation in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the number of ordinary figure reservation is decremented by one. Then, the normal figure changing process is set (step B321), and the normal figure normal processing ends. The result of the general figure and the variation pattern set in the above processing are transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 can execute the corresponding effect.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 75 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 75, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in a timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process for setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and the like and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (Step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and the progress of the effect including the setting of the launch direction indication display 99 for instructing the launch direction of the game ball is controlled. The effect display editing process (step C13) for making settings for setting and editing the drawing command is performed, and the preparation end of the drawing command is set (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the current time is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of the sound from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 (step C19), a board effect setting process for controlling the effect (step C20), and a process of clearing the WDT (step C8) Return to).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 76 shows a received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (Step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (Step C210; N), the process returns to Step C207. When it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 77 shows a received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In the received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Also, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C234). In C234; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for commanding an operation related to a small hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, or the like). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C237; Y), the big hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what the stop symbol of the special figure is). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol command (step C239; Y), the symbol command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of single-shot type commands such as the hold number command and the error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. The single command includes a customer waiting demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-reading symbol command (step C243). If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the pre-reading symbol-related command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol-related command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching pattern command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching variable command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. A look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not a big hit occurs when a special-figure variation display game corresponding to a start-up memory (holding) in which the special-figure variation display game is not executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability to the player, the display of the decoration special figure start display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the normal mode. For example, an effect display is performed. The pre-reading commands (the pre-reading fluctuation command and the pre-reading symbol command) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the starting memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect. It is transmitted to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display. By the processing in the effect control device 300 as described above, an effect or the like according to the game state on the display device 41 is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of an execution mode of the universal map change display game during the universal power support. FIG. 78 shows a general-purpose change pattern that can be selected during general-purpose support. There are three types of general pattern fluctuation patterns during general power support, patterns 1 to 3, and one of them is selected based on a general pattern fluctuation pattern random number.

  Pattern 1 has a normal variation time of 200 ms and a selection probability of 90%. This pattern 1 has the highest selection probability and is highly likely to be selected in a plurality of continuous normal-floating display games. During the period in which the normal-floating display game in which this pattern 1 is selected is continuous, as described with reference to FIG. 22A, the normal-floating winning device 37 is opened and the game ball is fired by the movable member 37b. Almost all of the game balls that have flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 become the first zone in which only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed.

  The pattern 2 and the pattern 3 are fluctuation patterns in which the normal fluctuation time is longer than the pattern 1. By selecting a longer time than the pattern 1, the closing time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 becomes longer than that of the pattern 1, so that the game ball can easily flow to the downstream side of the normal variable prize device 37 and flow down to the downstream side. The number of game balls to be played increases, and a prize in the second starting winning opening 97 occurs at a fixed rate during the regular power support, and the second zone becomes a zone where the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. . That is, the second zone is a zone in which the game balls can easily flow to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 from the first zone. Since the result and the general pattern of the general figure change display game are transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the general figure change display game, the effect control device 300 grasps whether it is the first zone or the second zone. It is possible, and a corresponding effect can be set.

  In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the transition condition to another game state is to execute the special figure change display game 100 times, that is, to reach the ceiling. By providing two zones and enabling the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is possible to expedite the achievement of the transition condition.

  That is, since the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time increases. Also, since the special figure 2 variable display game has a high probability of a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game must be forcibly stopped without a result of the deviation without waiting for the end of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. And the number of executions of the special figure change display game per unit time is increased. Furthermore, even if the special figure 1 variable display game which is a big hit is executed, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss because the small figure is derived first in the special figure 2 variable display game. As a result, it is possible to prevent a transition to another game state due to the occurrence of a big hit.

  As a result, in the case of the first specific game state ST2, the timing of shifting to the third specific game state ST4, which is more advantageous for the player, is advanced, and the player's sense of expectation is increased to enhance the interest of the game. be able to. Further, in the case of the second specific game state ST3, the transition timing to the normal game state ST1 which is more disadvantageous for the player is advanced, so that the player's feeling of anxiety can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The pattern 2 has a normal variation time of 5000 ms and a selection probability of 5%. In this pattern 2, since the normal fluctuation time is long, the closing time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is long, and there is a possibility that the second start winning opening 97 on the downstream side may win. The number of special figure 2 variable display games expected to be executed when this pattern 2 is selected is two. In other words, it is expected that the special figure 2 variable display game will be a small hit and the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped twice as a result, and a total of four special figure variable display games will be executed. Is executed in a short time, and the effect of reducing the number of games until the game reaches the ceiling can be given. The effect corresponding to the second zone can be executed during the open period of the normal fluctuation winning game 37 in which the pattern 2 is selected and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 when the general fluctuation display game has a specific result. As an effect corresponding to the second zone, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that a period until the ceiling is reached is reduced.

  Pattern 3 generally has a variation time of 10,000 ms and a selection probability of 5%. The zone is the second zone in the open period of the normal variation winning game 37 when the general variation display game in which the pattern 3 is selected and the general variation display game has a specific result. This pattern 3 also has a long closing time of the ordinary fluctuation prize winning device 37 because the normal figure fluctuation time is long similarly to the pattern 2, and there is a possibility that the second starting prize opening 97 on the downstream side may win. The number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is expected to be executed when this pattern 3 is selected is 4, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure variable display game are executed eight times in a short time. As a result, the effect of reducing the number of games required to reach the ceiling can be provided.

  FIG. 79 shows an example of the execution state of the special figure change display game during the support of the ordinary power, in the case of the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3. In the upper row, zones classified according to the ease with which game balls flow down to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation prize device 37, the execution mode of the normal fluctuation display game, the operation mode of the normal fluctuation prize device 37, the second start prize The state of the starter 2 switch of the mouth 97 is shown, and the lower part shows the execution mode of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the operation mode of the special variable winning device 38. The upper and lower stages are running on the same time axis.

  In this example, first, the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 ends (t11), the ending time of the hit state of the general figure ends (t12), and a new general figure fluctuation display game is started (t12). ). In the normal figure fluctuation display game, the pattern 1 is selected, and the hit result is derived after a short fluctuation time (t12 to t13). After that, the normal figure winning state is reached after the general figure stopping time for stopping and displaying the result, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is opened (t14), and closed after a predetermined time (t16), and the normal figure winning state ends. .

  In this case, since the pattern 1 is also selected in the general figure change display game before the general figure change display game, the first zone is continued. During the period in which the first zone continues, the closing time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is short (from t11 to t14), and the game ball that has reached the ordinary variable prize device 37 during the closing stays on the movable member 37b. Become. Therefore, the game balls hardly flow down to the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37, and it is unlikely that the game balls will be awarded to the second starting winning port 97. Therefore, only the special figure 1 variable display game is mainly used. Be executed.

  After that, a new ordinary figure change display game is started (t17). In this ordinary figure fluctuation display game, pattern 2 is selected, and a fluctuation time longer than that of pattern 1 is set (t17 to t23). As a result, the closing time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is prolonged, and the game ball flows down the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to win the second starting winning opening 97 (t19). When the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game ends, a winning result is obtained (t23), and when the normal state win state is reached, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (t24). As a result, the game ball does not flow downstream of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, but the game ball that has flowed downstream before opening is awarded to the second starting winning opening 97 (t27).

  When a predetermined time elapses from the opening of the ordinary variable prize device 37, the ordinary variable prize device 37 is closed (t33), and the hit state of the ordinary figure ends (t34). During the period (t17 to t33) from the start of the general-figure variation display game in which the pattern 2 is selected to the end of the general-figure hit state based on the general-figure variation display game, the normal-variation winning device 37 is provided more than the first zone. This is a second zone where the number of game balls that can flow down to the downstream side can be easily reduced, that is, the number of game balls that flow down to the downstream side is large.

  The special figure change display game can be executed independently of the ordinary figure change display game. In the special figure 1 variable display game, the execution right can be stored as the start memory, so that it is executed without interruption in most cases in the first zone (t15, t18). Every time this special figure variation display game is started, the remaining game number, which is the number of games that can be executed in the specific game state, is subtracted.

  As described above, a winning in the second start winning opening 97 occurs due to the selection of the pattern 2 (t19), and accordingly, the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t20). The number of remaining games is also reduced by the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. This special figure 2 variable display game ends with a small hit result earlier than the running special figure 1 variable display game ends (t21), and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. Becomes When the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with the small hit result, the second special game state is entered, and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t22 to t25). When the second special game state ends (t26), a new special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the start memory (t26).

  During the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, a game ball is newly won in the second starting winning opening 97 (t27), and accordingly, the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t28). The number of remaining games is also reduced by the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 variable display game ends with a small hit result earlier than the running special figure 1 variable display game ends (t29), and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. When the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a small hit result, the second special game state is set, and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t30 to t31). When the second special game state ends (t32), a new special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the start memory (t32).

  In the specific game state, the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is out is 4600 ms, and the second special game based on the special figure 2 variable display game from the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a small hit. The time until the end of the gaming state is 4204 ms at the maximum. Depending on the start timing of the special figure 2 variable display game, the digestion speed of the number of games is approximately double as compared with the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is not executed. In this manner, by providing a zone in which the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed in the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3, the number of remaining games can be reduced more quickly, and the ceiling ( Here, it is possible to reduce the time required to reach 100 games).

  Here, by increasing the normal figure fluctuation time, the game ball is caused to flow to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 so as to have a possibility of winning in the second start winning opening 97. The game ball may flow to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by a method other than the above. For example, a fanfare time set before the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened in the normal drawing stop time or a normal drawing winning state, and an ending time set after all the normal fluctuation winning devices 37 are released in the normal drawing winning state May be lengthened. Further, in the opening pattern of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a closing time may be provided as an interval time so that the game ball flows down to the downstream side.

  In the case where these times are made longer to flow downstream, the same time may be always set, or these times may be selected by lottery or the like. However, if the probability of selecting a long time that can flow down to the downstream side is high, the frequency of winning in the special variable winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small hit increases, and the number of holding balls increases during the Poden support. Therefore, it is necessary to appropriately set the time and the frequency in consideration of the structure of the game area 32 and the like.

  Further, a method other than the above-described method is also conceivable. For example, a period during which the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is not opened may be provided so that many misses occur during the regular telephone support. Further, even when the normal variable winning device 37 is open, a certain number of game balls may flow downstream without winning. Further, if a certain number of start memories can be stored for the special figure 2 variable display game, a start memory is generated by winning in the second start winning opening 97 during execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, and The special figure 2 variable display game of the number of times can be executed, and the period until the ceiling is effectively reached can be shortened. In this case, the effect corresponding to the second zone may be continued until all the starting memories for the special figure 2 variable display game are consumed.

  FIG. 80 shows an example of display on the display device 41. FIG. 80A shows an example of a display in the normal gaming state ST1. In the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decorative special figure 1 game display unit for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 1 variable display game among the first decorative games forming the decorative special figure variable display game. 85a are provided. Here, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display. The result is displayed in a result mode constituted by a combination of three pieces of identification information, and one of the result modes of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss is displayed according to the result of the special figure change display game. In the normal gaming state ST1, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main change, so the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the irregular figure special change 2 variable display game is not displayed but displayed. Is also good.

  Further, a first storage display unit 83a for displaying a decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the first start memory is provided at a lower center portion of the display area. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a is one-to-one corresponding to the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the storage order. Here, there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start storage display at the left end is the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time the display is completed. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 change display game and the change pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode. In FIG. 80 (a), a look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display is changed for the first start memory having the first digestion order is performed.

  On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, there is provided an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information about the start storage corresponding to the currently executed special figure change display game. At the start of the special figure change display game, the decoration special figure start storage display at the left end of the first storage display section 83a shifts to the running storage change display section 84, and the result and the change of the special figure change display game to be executed are displayed. A pattern or the like is suggested by its display mode.

  A first start storage number display section 86a for displaying the first start storage number is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. In the first start storage number display section 86a, the number of first start memories is displayed by a numeral, and FIG. 80A shows that there are three first start memories. An effect mode display section 87 for displaying the current effect mode is provided at the upper left of the display area. Here, the normal mode, that is, the normal game state ST1 is shown.

  In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 change display game is not generated, the start memory display unit for displaying the second start memory is not provided. When the second start memory for holding the start of the display game is generated, the second start memory is displayed similarly to the first memory display unit 83a and the first start memory number display unit 86a.

  FIG. 80 (b) shows an example of display in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3. In the upper right portion of the display area of the display device 41, a first start memory number display section 86a for displaying the number of first start memories, and a special figure 1 variable display of the second decorative game forming the decorative special figure variable display game. A second decorative special figure 1 game display section 88a for displaying a special decorative figure change display game relating to the game is provided. Further, in the lower right of the display area, a second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game among the second decorative games forming the decorative special figure variable display game Is provided.

  In the first start storage number display section 86a, the number of the first start storage is displayed by a numeral, and FIG. 80B shows that the first start storage is zero. The first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a displays the decorative special figure variable display game by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. The second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b display the decorative special figure variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information and then stopping the display. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of one piece of identification information, and one of “○” indicating a big hit, “Δ” indicating a small hit, and “X” indicating a loss is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated, the second start memory number display unit for displaying the number of the second start memories is not provided. In the case where the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is generated, the second start memory for displaying the number of the second start memories in the same manner as the first start memory number display section 86a. A number display section is provided.

  The effect mode display section 87 indicates that the mode is the chance mode, that is, the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3. Here, it is not clearly shown which of the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3 is, but it may be suggested or notified which gaming state it is.

  At the lower left of the display area, there is provided a remaining number display section 90 for displaying the remaining number of executions of the special figure change display game serving as a general-purpose support. The first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 are shifted to another game state by executing a special figure change display game a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) from the end of the special game state. Thus, it can be said that the display of the remaining number display section 90 indicates a period from the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3 to a transition to another game state.

  At the lower center of the display area, there is provided a continuous number display section 96 that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and displays the number of big hits in a specific period that is completed when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The continuous number display section 96 can be displayed in a game state other than the normal game state ST1. FIG. 80B shows that three big hits have occurred.

  The start condition of the specific period is established when a big hit is derived in the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period is established by returning from the game state other than the normal game state ST1 to the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in principle, the continuous number display section 96 displays the number of jackpots that have occurred before returning to the normal game state ST1 as the first hit in the normal game state ST1, which is a jackpot in which the start condition of the specific period is satisfied. Is displayed.

  Further, a launch direction instruction display 99 for instructing the launch direction of the game ball is displayed at the lower right of the display area. As the launch direction instruction display 99, it is possible to display a display indicating that the player is right-handed in a specific game state in which the game proceeds with right-handed play or in a special game state. Further, when the game is shifted to a state in which the game proceeds by left-handed, a display indicating that the player is left-handed can be displayed as the launch direction instruction display 99. Note that the launch direction instruction display 99 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 80 (c) shows an example of display in the third specific game state ST4. In the upper right portion of the display area of the display device 41, a first start memory number display section 86a for displaying the number of first start memories, and a special figure 1 variable display of the first decorative game forming the decorative special figure variable display game. A first special special figure 1 display section 85a for displaying a special special figure change display game relating to a game, and a special special figure variable display game relating to the special figure 1 variable display game among the second decorative games forming the special special figure change display game Is displayed on the display unit 88a.

  Further, at the center of the display area, an effect display unit 89 for effect display by a character or the like is provided. The effect display unit 89 mainly displays an effect according to the fluctuation pattern and result of the special figure 2 variable display game that is the main fluctuation, and the player can use the effect display to display the progress of the special figure variable display game. And the results can be understood.

  In the third specific game state ST4, a display in which the identification information is largely displayed as in the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a in FIG. 80A is not performed, but the result is obtained only when the result is derived. You may make it display a mode large. For example, the identification information is enlarged from the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a or the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b corresponding to the special figure variable display game from which the result is derived, and displayed in the center of the display area. In such a manner, the display is performed such that the identification information is reduced on the original display unit at the end of the stop display time. Even during such display, the display of the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a and / or the first decorative special figure 2 game display section 85b is maintained.

  The effect mode display section 87 indicates that the mode is the small hit RUSH mode, that is, the third specific game state ST4. Further, at the lower left of the display area, there is provided a prize ball number display section 91 indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the second special game state during execution of the second special game state. Here, it is shown that 30 prize balls have been obtained in the second special game state. Further, in the lower left portion of the display area, the total number of prize balls indicating the number of prize balls acquired from the start of the third specific game state ST4 to the transition to the first special game state following the end of the third specific game state ST4. A display unit 92 is provided. Here, it is shown that 600 prize balls have been acquired so far.

  Note that the total number of prize balls acquired in the first special game state is also added to the total number of prize balls display section 92, and the number of prize balls acquired from the start of the third special game state ST4 to the end of the first special game state. May be indicated. Further, the number of prize balls acquired in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 is also added to indicate the number of prize balls acquired from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the return to the normal game state ST1. You may do it. However, in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, a certain number of prize balls are obtained but the ball is consumed more than that, so the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3. May not be added to the number of prize balls.

  FIG. 81 shows an example of the effect in the second zone in which the pattern 2 or the pattern 3 which is the general-purpose variation pattern having a long variation time in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 is selected. In this example, an example of the effect according to the example shown in FIG. 79 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), first, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped in the state of the first zone. When the universal map change display game serving as the second zone is started during this stop display time (t17 in FIG. 79), the zone notification display 93 indicates that the zone is the second zone as shown in FIG. 81 (b). Ceiling shortening zone !! "is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), the special figure 1 variable display game is started (t18 in FIG. 79), and the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a and the second decorative special figure 1 game display section 88a change. When the display is started, the value of the first start storage number display section 86a is subtracted. Further, the remaining number display section 90 displays a subtraction value of the number of remaining games in the special figure variation display game started in the second zone instead of displaying the number of remaining games. Here, "-1 game" is displayed with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (d), the special figure 2 variable display game is started during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game (t20 in FIG. 79), and the variable display is performed on the second decorative special figure 2 game display section 88b. Is started. The remaining number display section 90 displays “−2 game” at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (e), the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result as the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped as a result of the small hit (t21 in FIG. 79). In the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a and the second decorative special figure 1 game display section 88a, the loss result mode is stopped and displayed, and in the second decorative special figure 2 game display section 88b, the small hit result mode is displayed. You.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the second special game state based on the small hit is completed and the special figure 1 variable display game is started (t26 in FIG. 79), the display of the remaining number display section 90 is "-3 game". When the special figure 2 variable display game is started during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game (t28 in FIG. 79), the display of the remaining number display section 90 is "-4 game". As shown in FIG. 81 (f), the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss as the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped as a result of the small hit (t29 in FIG. 79).

  When the second special game state based on the small hit ends, the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 81 (g) (t32 in FIG. 79), and the remaining number display section 90 displays "-5 game". ". During the execution of this special figure 1 change display game, the second zone ends by starting the general figure change display game that becomes the first zone (t34 in FIG. 79). Along with this, the remaining number display section 90 performs an effect of displaying the subtraction value shown on the zone notification display 93 in a state where the remaining game number before the start of the second zone is displayed, as shown in FIG. 81 (i). Thus, the remaining game number after the subtraction is displayed. By performing such an effect, it is possible to effectively notify that the number of games required to reach the ceiling by the second zone is reduced.

  As described above, the game is provided based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, provided with the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the result of the game is a special result. In such a case, a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided with a gaming control means (gaming control device 100) for controlling the game in a comprehensive manner, and a gaming winning area is formed in the gaming area 32. A normal variable winning device 37 which can be converted into a closed state where a ball cannot be won and an open state where a game ball can be easily won, and a second starting winning port 97 serving as a starting winning port, are provided with a normal variable winning. The device 37 and the second starting winning opening 97 are arranged on the same game ball flow path so as to be able to aim at the same time, and the game control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the first operating state. , Winning is easier than in the first operation state. Can be set to one of the second operating state, when the second operating state, the first zone, so that the second zone, the it is possible to switch on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition. Therefore, even in the gaming state (specific gaming state), which is the first operation state, it is possible to prevent the game from being changed and becoming a monotonous game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second zone, the flow to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easier than in the first zone. Further, the second zone has a larger number of gaming balls flowing down the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than the first zone. In the second zone, it is more difficult to win the normal variable winning device 37 than in the first zone. Therefore, even in the gaming state (specific gaming state), which is the first operation state, it is possible to prevent the game from being changed and becoming a monotonous game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the game control means executes a general-floor variation display game in which the identification information is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined fluctuating time based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition and then stopped, and a result of the general-figure fluctuating display game is determined as a specific result The normal fluctuation winning device is configured to be changed from the closed state to the open state when the fluctuation time of the general fluctuation display game in the second zone is longer than the fluctuation time of the general fluctuation display game in the first zone. It means that it was made longer. Therefore, the period during which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state in the second zone can be lengthened, and the flow down to the downstream side from the first zone can be facilitated.

  Further, the game control means executes the first game as a game based on the winning of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37, and executes the second game as the game based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening 97. That is to say. Therefore, the type of the game to be executed is changed due to the difference in ease of flowing the game ball to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and it is possible to prevent the game from being changed and becoming a monotonous game. Can be improved.

  The game control means can execute the first game and the second game at the same time, and the special result includes the first special result and the second special result, and the probability that the game result becomes the first special result is determined. , The first game and the second game have the same probability, and can be set to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state, and the game result is a second special result. Is the same probability in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, and when the first game and the second game are being executed, the other game is based on the second special result. Is stopped as a result of the loss. Therefore, the type of the game to be executed due to the difference in ease of flowing the game ball to the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37, and whether or not the game is executed at the same time are changed, so that the game becomes monotonous. Can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the other game is stopped as a result of the loss, the digestion speed of the game can be increased.

  In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is located on the upstream side of the second starting winning opening 97, the second game has a higher probability of obtaining the second special result than the first game, and the game control means sets the special game state to the special game state. It is possible to set a first game state to be a first operation state after the end, and to set a second operation state based on executing a predetermined number of games without deriving a first special result in the first game state. This means that the state shifts to the second game state. Therefore, whether or not the game is executed at the same time changes depending on the difference in ease of flowing the game ball to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the length of the period until the transition of the game state can be changed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the result of the other variable display game is the second special result during the execution of the one variable display game and the second special game state is executed, the variable time of the other variable display game ends. Then, when the second special result is stopped and displayed, one of the variable display games is forcibly stopped with a disconnection result, but the stop display time of the other variable display game ends and the second special game state May be forcibly stopped when one of the variable display games is lost when the game is started.

  If the result of the other variable display game is the second special result during the execution of the one variable display game and the second special game state is executed, the variable time of the other variable display game ends. Then, one variable display game may be interrupted from the time when the second special result is stopped and displayed until the end of the second special game state. Further, one variable display game may be interrupted from the time when the stop display time of the other variable display game ends and the second special game state is started to the time when the second special game state ends.

  In addition, the start time of the interruption or the forced stop may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so that the time when the special result is stopped and displayed and the time when the special game state is started are selected. You may do it. Further, the start of the interruption or the forced stop is not limited to the time when the special result is stopped and displayed or the time when the special game state is started, and may be started at another timing. The end of the suspension may be at a timing other than the end of the special game state. Further, the interruption state may be generated when the result of the other variable display game is the first special result and the first special game state is executed during the execution of the one variable display game. In addition, for each of the special maps 1 and 2, when the first special result or the second special result is derived, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether to suspend or forcibly stop.

  Next, the display mode of the launch direction instruction display 99 will be described. FIG. 82 shows an example of the display mode of the launch direction instruction display 99 for instructing a right strike. The launch direction instruction display 99 is an animation display that changes at a constant cycle. The launch direction instruction display 99 shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to (c) changes from one display as shown in FIG. 82 (a) to two displays as shown in FIG. 82 (b). Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the arrow changes to three displays, and the animation display returns to the display of FIG. 82 (a). The display time of each display in FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (c) is a predetermined time, and the time of one cycle until returning to the same display is always a fixed time.

  82 (d) to 82 (f) show other examples of the launch direction instruction display 99. In this launch direction instruction display, an animation display is shown in which the rightward arrow gradually becomes longer and returns to the original length again. The change of the arrow may be continuous or stepwise, but the time of one cycle until returning to the same display is always a fixed time. 82 (g) to 82 (i) also show another example of the launch direction instruction display 99. This launch direction instruction display is an animation display in which the color inside the rightward arrow changes rightward. The color change may be continuous or stepwise, but the time of one cycle until returning to the same display is always a fixed time.

  FIG. 83 shows an example of the display of the progress of the game and the launch direction instruction display 99. In the example shown in FIG. 83 (a), first, the game is in a normal game state ST1 in which the game proceeds left-handed. In this state, the launch direction instruction display 99 is not performed. When the special figure change display game becomes a big hit and the game enters the first special game state in which the game proceeds in a right-handed manner (t51), a launch direction instruction display 99 for instructing a right-handed start is started. The display modes a, b, and c mean the display of (a), (b), and (c) in FIG. 82, respectively. When the launch direction instruction display 99 is started, it is started from the display of a. Of course, the display may start from the display of b or c, may always start from the same display, or may start from the display selected according to a certain rule or randomly.

  During the first special game state, the display of a, b, and c is repeatedly displayed at a constant cycle. This cycle is maintained without changing any of the start and end of the fanfare, the round, the interval and the ending, and the opening and closing of the special variable winning device 38. Then, when the first special game state ends, the first specific game state starts (t52). The first specific game state is also a state in which the game proceeds in a right-handed manner, and the firing direction does not change before and after the change in the game state. In this case, in the launch direction instruction display 99, the cycle displayed in the first special game state is maintained, and here, the display of “b” is performed over the first special game state and the first specific game state. Continue, and the change proceeds without breaking the cycle.

  Stopping (t53), ending (t54), starting (t54), starting (t55), stopping (t56), ending (t57) the special figure 2 variable display game in the first specific game state, Even when the small hit result is derived (t56) and the other special figure change display game is forcibly stopped (t56) due to the small hit result, the cycle of the change of the launch direction instruction display 99 is maintained. In addition, the start (t56) and the end (t59) of the second special game state based on the small hit occurring in the first specific game state, the opening (t57), the closing (t58) of the special variable winning device 38, the second special game Even if the fanfare, round, interval and ending in the state are started and ended, the cycle of the change of the launch direction indication display 99 is maintained.

  Then, when the special figure change display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state, the game shifts to the third specific game state (t60). The third specific game state is also a state in which the game proceeds with a right strike, and the firing direction does not change before and after the change in the game state. In this case, in the launch direction instruction display 99, the cycle displayed in the first specific game state is maintained, and here, the display of c is performed across the first specific game state and the third specific game state. Continue, and the change proceeds without breaking the cycle. Further, the display position of the launch direction instruction display 99 changes between the display in the first specific game state shown in FIG. 80 (b) and the display in the third specific game state shown in FIG. 80 (c). However, the cycle of the cycle display is maintained even if the firing direction instruction display 99 moves as described above.

  Start (t60), stop (t62), start (t61, t65), stop (t62, t66), end (t63, t67) of the special figure 1 variable display game in the third specific game state Even if the small hit result is derived (t62) and the other special figure change display game is forcibly stopped (t62) by deriving the small hit result, the cycle of the change of the launch direction instruction display 99 is maintained. In addition, the start (t62) and the end (t65) of the second special game state based on the small hit occurring in the third specific game state, the opening (t63), the closing (t64) of the special variable winning device 38, the second special game Even if the fanfare, round, interval and ending in the state are started and ended, the cycle of the change of the launch direction indication display 99 is maintained.

  Note that the case where the cycle of the change of the launch direction instruction display 99 is maintained is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the timing at which the identification information temporarily stops in each of the variable display areas, the display area at the time of developing the reach state, etc. The changing cycle of the launch direction instruction display 99 is maintained even at the timing of moving or reducing the first decorative special figure 1 game display section 85a displayed at the center. Furthermore, in a special figure variable display game, in a decorative special figure variable display game, a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then the unit variable display is temporarily stopped two or more times to derive a result mode. In the continuous variation display mode, the period of change of the launch direction instruction display 99 is maintained even at the timing of temporarily stopping the identification information and the timing of starting the re-variation.

  FIG. 83B shows an example of a display mode when the launch direction instruction display 99 is temporarily hidden. In this example, the launch direction instruction display 99 is temporarily hidden during execution of the special figure change display game (t82 to t83). Thus, even during the period in which the launch direction instruction display 99 is not displayed, the cycle of the change in the launch direction instruction display 99 is maintained as shown by the dotted line. Then, when the image is redisplayed (t83), it is redisplayed from the state according to this cycle.

  In the example shown in FIG. 83 (b), the special figure 1 variable display game in the first specific game state is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the firing direction instruction display 99 is temporarily provided during the period when the firing direction does not change. Is applicable to all cases in which is hidden. Further, when the firing direction indication display 99 is not displayed due to a change in the firing direction, the present invention is also applicable to a case where the firing direction changes again and the display of the firing direction indication display 99 is started.

  FIG. 84 shows an example in which the launch direction instruction display 99 moves. In this example, the game is in the first specific game state or the second specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game ends as shown in FIG. 84 (a), and a new special game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (b). The special figure 1 change display game has been started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), the state is N reach, and as shown in FIG. 84 (d), it has developed into SP reach.

  With the development to SP reach, the launch direction instruction display 99 moves to the upper center of the display area, and the display mode is changed to a single-row mode. The cycle of the launch direction instruction display 99 is maintained even if such a movement or a change in the form is made. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), when the SP reach effect proceeds, the launch direction instruction display 99 is temporarily hidden, and as shown in FIG. 84 (f), the effect indicating the deviation result is performed in the SP reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (g), the SP reach effect ends, the display returns to the original display form, and the result form of the result is shown.

  Upon returning to the original display mode, the launch direction instruction display 99 is displayed again. The display position and form at this time are different from the position and form before non-display shown in FIG. 84 (d). That is, the display position and form of the launch direction instruction display 99 before the non-display is different from the display position and form of the launch direction instruction display 99 after redisplay. Even if such a movement or a change in the form is made, the cycle before the display is not displayed is maintained even after the redisplay, as described with reference to FIG.

  In this example, the development to SP reach has been described as an example. However, the firing direction instruction display 99 may be moved or the form may be changed by other triggers. Maintain the cycle before and after. Further, only one of the movement and the change of the form may be performed, and the cycle is maintained in this case as well. Further, in addition to the movement and the change of the form, the display area of the firing direction instruction display 99 may be enlarged or reduced, and in this case, the cycle is maintained.

  As described above, by maintaining the cycle of the launch direction instruction display 99 regardless of the change in the game state or the progress of the special figure change display game, the launch direction instruction display 99 and the change in the game state and the special state are displayed. It becomes clear that the progress of the figure change display game is independent. The launch direction instruction display 99 that has changed periodically ends the previous periodic display in response to a change such as a change in the game state or some change in the special figure change display game, and newly starts a new periodic display. When the display is started, there is a possibility that the display may be perceived as an instruction to start firing from the timing. In other words, there is a possibility that the firing direction instruction display 99 indicating the firing direction is misunderstood as indicating the firing timing. However, such a misunderstanding can be prevented by maintaining the period of the launch direction instruction display 99.

  As described above, the game is provided based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, provided with the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the result of the game is a special result. In such a case, in a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling the game, and a display device 41 capable of displaying information related to the game are provided. The game area 32 includes a game area on one side and a game area on the other side, and the player adjusts the firing force of the game ball so that the game area can be in either the game area on the one side or the game area on the other side. The control means is configured to be able to select whether to let the ball flow down, the control means can set one game state from among a plurality of game states, and transition the game state based on a predetermined transition condition being satisfied Composed of each game state It is predetermined whether the game ball is to be fired in one of the game area on the one side and the game area on the other side to advance the game, and the firing direction instructing the firing direction of the game ball according to the game state The instruction display 99 can be displayed on the display device 41, and a periodic display in which the firing direction instruction display 99 is changed at a constant period can be executed. When the game state does not change, regardless of the game execution state This means that the cycle of the cycle display is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the firing direction instruction display 99 indicating the firing direction from being misunderstood as indicating the firing timing, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  Further, the control unit can re-display the firing direction instruction display 99 after hiding it during the period in which the game state does not change, and maintain the cycle of the cycle display before hiding after re-display. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the firing direction instruction display 99 indicating the firing direction from being misunderstood as indicating the firing timing, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  Further, the launch direction instruction display can be displayed at different positions in the display area of the display device 41, so that the cycle of the cycle display is maintained even if the display position is changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the firing direction instruction display 99 indicating the firing direction from being misunderstood as indicating the firing timing, and to ensure fairness of the game. It can also be said that the launch direction instruction display can be moved within the display area of the display device 41, and the period of the period display is maintained before and after the movement. Also, it can be said that the launch direction instruction display can be displayed in different display modes, and the cycle of the periodic display is maintained even if the display mode is changed.

  Further, the control unit can display the firing direction instruction display 99 again after hiding it during the period in which the game state does not change, and display the firing direction instruction display before the hiding. Even if the display position of the launch direction indication display after the display is different from the display position, the cycle of the cycle display before non-display is maintained even after redisplay. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the firing direction instruction display 99 indicating the firing direction from being misunderstood as indicating the firing timing, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  Although the launch direction instruction display 99 shows the right-handed instruction information for instructing right-handing, the left-handed instruction information for instructing left-handing can be similarly performed. Further, the cycle of the launch direction instruction display 99 is maintained for all triggers such as a change in the game state or some change in the special figure change display game, but a new periodic display is provided for some triggers. You may make it start.

  In addition, the initial display (display a in the above example) displayed at the start of the launch direction instruction display 99 is started at an opportunity such as a change in the game state or some change in the special figure change display game. May be avoided. Depending on the period of the periodic display, there is a possibility that these triggers and the display start timing of the initial display coincide with each other unintentionally. In such a case, the display start timing of the initial display may be shifted. For example, the display time before the initial display (the display of c in the above example) is slightly increased to delay the display start timing of the initial display.

  Further, the launch direction instruction display 99 may be displayed at a plurality of places at the same time, and these periodic displays may be synchronized. Synchronizing the plurality of launch direction instruction displays 99 means that, for example, when the plurality of launch direction instruction displays 99 change stepwise, the display mode simultaneously shifts to the next stage. Further, the time required for one cycle of the cycle display may be the same.

  In addition, a plurality of firing direction instruction displays 99 may be displayed in the same display mode at a plurality of locations. In this case, they may have the same size or different sizes. Further, different display modes may be displayed at a plurality of locations. For example, a plurality of launch direction instruction displays 99 having different display modes as shown in FIG. 82 may be displayed.

  Further, in addition to the launch direction instruction display 99 displayed on the display device 41, a display for instructing the launch direction may be performed on another display device, or a lamp for instructing the launch direction may be provided. Further, the firing direction may be instructed by an operating accessory. Also in this case, the cycle display of the launch direction instruction display 99 displayed on the display device 41 may be synchronized with the display mode, lamp lighting mode, and operating mode of the accessory on other display devices.

  Further, in the case of performing a periodically changing period display in the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, the display may be synchronized with the period display of the firing direction instruction display 99. Also, as for the cycle display in the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, the cycle of the cycle display is maintained irrespective of the change of the game state or the non-display state, as in the case described above. You may do it.

  Further, a suggestion or a notification about the game may be made by changing the display mode such as breaking the cycle of the cycle display of the launch direction instruction display 99. By breaking the cycle of the cycle display of the launch direction instruction display 99, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state of the periodic display impressed by the player, and suggests or notifies the game based on the discomfort state. be able to. The content of the suggestion or the notification may be any, but the result or the variation pattern of the running special figure variation display game may be suggested or reported, or the prefetch result about the starting memory is suggested or reported. You may do it. In addition, when the derivation probability of a special result can be selected and set from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation means provided on the gaming machine, the set probability setting value is suggested or notified. You may do it.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 79, the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a, the second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85b, the second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a, and the second decorative special figure 2 game display The interval at which the identification information changes in the unit 88b does not match the interval of the display change in the launch direction instruction display 99 so that the special figure change display game and the launch direction instruction display 99 are not considered to be linked. You may do it. For example, the interval at which the identification information changes when the display is changed at a low speed before the stop or the temporary stop does not coincide with the change interval of the display in the launch direction indication display 99. In addition, the period of the shaking when the identification information is displayed in a shaking manner at the time of the temporary stop, the interval until the display changes to the next display in the launch direction instruction display 99, and the display changes to the display of a predetermined number ahead May not be equal to the interval until the display or the cycle in which the display goes around. Similarly, the interval between changes in the display on the special figure display in the collective display device 50 provided on the game board may not be the same as the interval between changes in the display on the launch direction instruction display 99.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 32 gaming area 37 Ordinary variable winning device (start winning port)
97 2nd start winning opening (starting winning opening)
100 game control device (game control means)

Claims (5)

A game area is provided in which a game ball can flow down, and a game is executed based on a prize of a game ball to a start winning port provided in the game area, and when a result of the game is a special result, In gaming machines that generate advantageous special gaming states,
Game control means for controlling the game overall,
In the game area,
A normal variable winning device that forms the starting winning opening, and can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and an open state in which game balls can be easily won,
A second start winning opening that forms the starting winning opening,
The normal fluctuation winning device and the second starting winning opening are arranged on the same game ball's flow path so as to be able to aim at the same time,
The game control means,
The operation state of the ordinary variable prize winning device can be set to one of a first operation state and a second operation state in which a prize is easier than the first operation state,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to switch between the first zone and the second zone based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition when the second operating state is established. The game control means,
A general variation display game in which the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and then stopped is executed, and when the result of the general variation display game is a specific result, the normal variation display game is performed. Configured to convert the winning device from the closed state to the open state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a change time of the general-purpose change display game in the second zone is longer than a change time of the general-purpose change display game in the first zone. The game control means,
Executing a first game as the game based on a winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning device,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a second game is executed as the game based on a winning of a game ball in the second starting winning opening. 4. The game control means,
The first game and the second game can be simultaneously executed,
The special result includes a first special result and a second special result,
The probability that the result of the game will be the first special result is the same probability in the first game and the second game, and is one of a low probability state and a high probability state higher than the low probability state. Crab can be set,
The probability that the result of the game is the second special result is the same probability regardless of the low probability state and the high probability state,
4. The method according to claim 3, wherein when the first game and the second game are being executed, based on one of the games having the second special result, the other game is stopped with a loss result. 5. Gaming machine. The normal variable winning device is located upstream of the second starting winning opening,
The second game has a higher probability of being the second special result than the first game,
The game control means,
It is possible to set a first game state to be the first operation state after the end of the special game state, and to execute the game a predetermined number of times without deriving the first special result in the first game state. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the game machine shifts to a second gaming state based on the second operation state.